Home

User`s Guide - Spitzer Science Center

1. FRAME_TIME 12 0 DITHER PATTERN TYPE Cycling N_POSITION 3 START POINT 95 DITHER SCALE large HN FRAMES DER POINTING 1 MAP TYPE RECTANGULAR ROWS 5 COLS 5 ROW_STEP 260 0 COL _STEP 260 0 ORIENT ARRAY ROW _OFFSET 0 0 COL OFFSET 0 0 N CYCLE 1 SPECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO RESOURCE EST TOTAL _ DURATION 2124 3 SLEW _TIME 457 8 SETTLE TIME 365 0 SLEW OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 UPLINK VOLUME 3211 DOWNLINK VOLUME 11490896 VERSION S18 0 1 INTEGRATION TIME IRAC 3 6 36 0 IRAC 4 5 36 0 ITRAC_5 8 0 0 ITRAC_8 0 0 0 June 18 2008 190 MOVING 1 n PM OBJ MAP AOT TYP AOR LABE DA Ei AOR_STATUS new TARGET NO TARGET TYP J TARGET NAM J POSITION RA 0 0 N_FRAMES _ TYPE R PECIAL R i o til ER ORI AR i S NT MOVING 1 OBJ PLINK VOLUM TARGE TARGET COORD _SYST POSITION ECT AVOIDANCE N_FRAM SPECIAL June AOT_TY AOR LAB FADOUT MODE ARRAY DATA COLLECTION HI DYNAMIC FRAME TIME ER_PATTERN ER_SCALE CI IRAC Post Cryo IRACPC Map HDR FIXED SINGLI GI WW Test _ Target COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 RA LON 1h02m03 00000s DEC _LAT 4d05m06 0000s EPOCH 2000 0 PM_DEC 0 0 E ERS YES
2. MIPS 24um_small_ FOV1 offset y v 16 5 z w 25 pixels relative to center MIPS 24um_ small FOV2 offset y v 16 5 z w 25 5 pixels relative to center MIPS 24um_ large FOV1 offset y v 0 z w 2 5 pixels relative to center MIPS 24um large FOV2 offset y v 0 z w 2pixels relative to center MIPS_70um_center Center of the full 70 um array FOV MIPS_70um_default small_FOV1 Position Offset y v 0 z w 6pixels relative to center MIPS_70um_default small _FOV2 Position Offset y v 0 z w 6 5pixels relative to center MIPS_70um_default large FOV1 Position Offset y v 2 5 z w tl relative to center MIPS 70um_fine FOV1 Position Offset y v 2 5 z w 1 pixels relativ to center MIPS 70um_fine FOV2 Position Offset y v 2 5 z w 0 5 pixels relative to center MIPS 70um_fine FOV3 Position Offset y v 30 z w 1 pixels relativ to center MIPS 70um_fine FOV4 Position Offset y v 30 z w 0 5 pixels relative to center MIPS 70um_ fine center Center of 70 um fine scale field MIPS 70um_minusY_ edge Position on th y v edge of FOV on the z w 0 median line MIPS SED 1 SED 1 chop FOV 1 offset Y 6 Z 4 pixels MIPS SED 2 SED 1 chop FOV2 offset Y 6 Z 4 pixels MIPS SED 3 SED 2 chop FOV 1 offset Y 12 Z 4 pixels MIPS SED 4 SED 2 ch
3. RED EXPOSURE TIME 30 N CYCLES SEQ 1 BLUE EXPOSURE _TIME 30 N CYCLES SEQ 1 DITHER PATTERN TYPE 5Positions DITHER_ SCALE Large SPECIAL IMPACT none LAT Kal EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO COMMENT START You cannot get resourc stimates for an AOR involving a moving target with a non standard or user defined ephemeris without first contacting the SSC Helpdesk at help spitzer caltech edu so that we can update the Spot ephemeris database to include your target COMMENT END AOT TYPE MIPS Photometry AOR_LABEL MIPS Photometry AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET YES TARGET TYPE MOVING SINGLE TARGET NAME M Vesta EPHEMERIS NAIF ID 2000004 NAIF NAM E M Vesta OBJECT AVOIDANCI EARTH YES OTHERS YE ea Hy MICRON 24 IELD SIZE SMALL EXPOSURE TIME 3 N CYCLES 1 MICRON_70 IMAGE SCALE FINE FIELD SIZE SMALL EXPOSURE TIME 10 N CYCLES 1 MICRON 160 MODE DEFAULT FIELD SIZE SMALL EXPOSURE TIME 10 N CYCLES 4 SPECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO RESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 1803 0416 SLEW TIME 36 7 SETTLE TIME 43 341568 SLEW _OVERHEAD 515 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD
4. na 130 141221 Re 130 14 12 22 Submitting the Proposal uuu aa nqa aaah e ed tule cate uwa es e EA 130 14 12 3 Updating an Existing Propos 133 14 13 Submitting a Spitzer Observing Proposal Review a nansssssssssss 134 15 Fixed Target and AOR Visualzapnon 136 15 1 Displaying and Manipulating Images 136 ISLI Image Contfol ss sss ahasuanasaqahkaqaqaqakaqaqaqakakaqaQaqakaqaqanqakasaqunaqua 136 15 122 Image Window Contro leao k k AS ae ee eege 137 15 13 Cursor Readout s sasasssasasassqaaqsananahananaqanaqaqaqqaqanaaansahanacnuanaquanaua 137 15 14 aver Er E 137 15 1 5 Three Color Image Display nunus 137 15 1 6 e EE 140 15 1 7 Measuring Area Statistics 00 cccccsesesceseeseeseeseeseeeeseeseesecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecaecsecsessecsecaeeaesaeeaeeas 140 15 2 Current Fixed Target Overlay ccecccccssessesscsseseceeceeenecnecsececececsececsecsecsecaecaecsecsecsececesnessesaeeaes 143 15 3 Overlaying ia Coordinate E EE 143 ISAs Overlayingia Catalon onn e a EET haw nwtn hen ster E ETES 143 15 57 Overlaying an Map Ssnan naa A Ea E u A au EE E aaa 146 15 6 Usine the SHCE TOO pentane e E EEEE E T EE 146 LSF Overlay NE AORS uu E n A u EA au E ua aaa 147 15 7 1 Features of AOTs when Overlaying an AOR 148 15 17 20 TRAC Mapping AOR i a eed in Cq EEN 149 15 73 IRS Staring AOR E 152 15 24 Overlaying Multiple Ke a u cite q
5. Instrument Settings You may select one mode Standard or Peak Up Only Standard Peakup Only IRS Slit On Ramp Duration of Cycles Hi Res 9 9 19 6 um vi 6 vi Hi Res 18 7 37 2 um vi BD v 4 Low Res 5 2 8 7 um v 60 vii Low Res 7 4 14 5 um Ile e Low Res 14 0 21 3 um iv 14 vii Low Res 19 5 38 0 um kam Flux Density Cale Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Cancel Help Figure 87 Example of an IRS Staring AOR for a moving target in this case Encke The astrometric coordinates for Encke on a given observation date are entered for a dummy fixed target Dummy Encke A moderate accuracy blue array peak up using a 2MASS star is selected Once the peak up star is selected you can replace your real moving target for the dummy by clicking the Target List button and selecting your real moving target from the list of targets Be sure that the target listed in the AOR window is now your real target and no longer the dummy target 11 2 5 Moving Target Peak up In Spot you can specify a fixed target as the peak up for a moving target for the IRS Staring AOT and IRS Spectral Mapping AOT see section 11 3 Use this particularly when peak up on your moving target is difficult due to its intrinsic brightness
6. Kal EK S H H C om o COMMENT START This is an example of using the peak up only option to image a possible peak up object in the field of your science target The peak up imaging will be done in the blue channel COMMENT END AOT TYPE IRS Staring AOR_LABEL IRS No Peak up AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED CLUSTER POSITIONS TARGET NAME Cluster Pos 2000 COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION1L RA _LON 2h03m04 00s DEC _LAT 5d06m07 0s PM RA 3 0 PM DEC 4 0 EPOCH 2000 0 POSITION2 RA_LON 2h03m15 00s DEC _LAT 5d04m03 0s PM RA 5 0 PM DEC 6 0 EPOCH 2000 0 POSITION3 RA _LON 2h03m30 00s DEC _LAT 4d50m00 0s PM RA 7 0 PM DEC 8 0 EPOCH 2000 0 OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES IS BACKGROUND AOR NO June 18 2008 183 Spot User s Guide v18 MODE STANDAR
7. Mouse ee g Issa 25 micron m31 gt Z Z Target a Base Image E Observations B issA 25 micron m31 2mass k m31 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 6 1 Figure 150 The current target position is marked on the 2MASS K band image by the red box It is easily seen here If you overlay the current target on a 5 ISSA image it can be difficult to see unless you zoom in the image eee Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Jajalo Sei CH l ejm e s Aal Alle Elmi as ae r Mouse Control Target m31 Type Fixed Single Left Mouse Button Select a point on the Image Shift Left Button Center the Image at point 2MASS PSC Mouse 131 LLL 000 m31 Udi Grid E Observations Bian 25 micron m31 Bj2mass k m31 Total Duration hrs 6 1 Figure 151 The left frame shows an equatorial J2000 degrees coordinate grid overlaid on the ISSA 25 um image The right frame shows the 2MASS Point Source catalog overlaid on the 2MASS K band image June 18 2008 144 Spot User s Guide v18 They must be On for selecting or highlighting to work The Color box at the top of the Catalog Window controls the color of the object s marks when they are On On box is checked It does not change t
8. n nnnnnnsssssssssss 76 10 7 2 Moving Object Visibility Information a nn 76 10 7 3 Spitzer Planning with Horizons nn nnnsssssssssss 76 10 8 Position Angle Focal Plane IRS Slits MIPS Scan amp SED Slit a 77 10 9 Estimating the Sky Background AAA 79 June 18 2008 4 Spot User s Guide v18 E Me E E 79 10 9 2 gt Spot Backeround Estimdtes 3 l cae heen ten es an ee eee eee be enh 80 10 9 3 Batch Mode Background Estimates nsn 80 10 9 4 Compute Backgrounds from Fe 80 11 Astronomical Observation Template 83 FU SIRAC Mapp ins s s dnietenatonnen amon iat nme neni Zeg gedeeft 83 LADD Stibarray Modes csccciccctecetccecececceecs cacccxcicecs case cecccecncxccaxcccees A E E E E E A E T 85 IR Stellar e ER 111 37 Ma npsuersgethetgg Siebert ee et Mins ch Shahn ee ee 87 11 14 Map Rows dnd Me E 88 ILIS Post CPy06 ER E 89 Fl VIRS Staring Mode ua A SASS SSS DES AE EE A E ESE NER 89 112 1 Standard Staring cccciccc scececesscec sece cocccece secs cass nn aa E cect cvs celdsecn EE A A E ERA A E EA 90 11 22 EE 90 12 ED RE uraypa h uu uq N N TNE 96 1122 4 gt Peaksup Target Flux En IC 96 11 2 5 Moving Target Peak up ccc eecscsscesseseeseeseeseeseeseeseesecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecaecaecaecaesaeseeaeeaees 97 1133 IRS Spectral Mapping ccceceecesse
9. oer Cancel Help Figure 100 The MIPS Spectral Energy Distribution AOT 11 8 MIPS Spectral Energy Distribution The Spectral Energy Distribution SED AOT is used to obtain low resolution R 20 spectra in the 70 um band over approximately the range of 55 95 um The AOT provides a series of target sky image pairs per cycle see the SOM for more details The observer specifies only the total number of basic observation cycles required see Figure 100 The observer may also select the exposure the chop distance in arcminutes and June 18 2008 107 Spot User s Guide v18 whether or not a small map is desired The mapping is essentially identical to that for Photometry Super Resolution mode 11 9 MIPS Total Power Mode MIPS is optimized to provide calibrated images of sources that are small enough that chopping can place them on and off the arrays particularly at 70 and 160 um The MIPS Total Power TP Mode AOT Figure 101 is used to measure the absolute brightness of highly extended emission e g zodiacal light by chopping between an internal dark position and the sky for each array Observers may select exposure time and the number of complete sky dark stimulator cycles MIPS Total Power Unique AOR Label MIPST 0000 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 32000s 41d16m08 5000s Hew Target Modify Targ Target List Instrument Settings Band On Exp Time secs
10. Figure 122 Proposal Submission Tool Co Investigator window Click on Add to add Co Is June 18 2008 125 Spot User s Guide v18 Click on Add and a small window appears where you can enter the appropriate information for a co investigator Figure 123 Click the OK button once you have entered the information The information is added to the list Figure 124 Click the Add button to continue to add co Investigators Clicking on a name in the list will activate the other Action buttons You can then Insert co investigator names between two others modify a co investigator s information delete it or move it up or down in the list Enter a new Co Investigator First Name Another Last Name Observer Institution Spitzer Science Center E mail help spitzer caltech edu Figure 123 Proposal Submission Tool Co Investigator entry window filled in with the appropriate information o amp amp lt lt o o s A Se T n _ nnR saxx c x lt o Q P H Co Investigators Actions Insert Modify Delete Move Up Move Down Co l Name Institute E mail Another Observer Spitzer Science Center janother spitzer caltech edu Yet Another Observer Spitzer Science Center yetanother spitzer caltech Observer Elsewhere XYZ University observer xyz edu Grad Stud
11. 3 0 10 k _ 0 40 Mapping and Dithering 2 00 Mapping Mode lapp te No i Dither Pattern O No Yes Set Dither Parameters Flux Density Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Exposures Help Cancel OK Figure 79 IRAC Post Cryo Subarray dialog 11 2 1 Standard Staring You can select any combination of slits in this mode 11 2 2 Peak up Targets There are three peak up options for IRS selectable from the middle section of the AOT window shown in Figure 80 IRS Peak up PCRS Peak up and No Peak up 4 high accuracy peak up requires precise knowledge of the peak up target s position Observers should carefully examine the peak up target s positional errors if it is from a published catalog The Spitzer Observation Planning Cookbook accessible from the SSC Proposal Kit web pages at http ssc spitzer caltech edu propkit provides a detailed description and excellent step by step instructions for configuring a peak up with the IRS 11 2 2 1 IRS Peak Up Targets For an IRS Peak up the peak up will be performed on the peak up arrays within the IRS instrument There is a blue or red wavelength band from which to choose The peak up target position can be specified by offsets in arcseconds from the real target or by June 18 2008 90 Spot User s Guide v18 RA and Dec position If you will use your science target for peaking
12. Figure 23 The image selection dialog specifying the URL of a FITS file This utility will also read in gzipped FITS files and FITS files with extensions You can create three color RGB image composites OC Choose your Image All Sky Image DIRBE 60 micron All Sky Image DIRBE 140 micron All Sky Image DIRBE 4 9 micron ISSA All Sky Image Cancel Plot Figure 24 The selection dialog for All Sky Images 7 6 11 All Sky Images Select from DIRBE 4 9 60 and 140 um and ISSA All Sky Images These are particularly useful for visualizing moving targets with high apparent rates The selection dialog is shown in Figure 24 Note that the ISSA All Sky Image is a low resolution IRAS composite which has been smoothed to 0 5 x0 5 resolution Unlike the individual ISSA plates it contains the zodiacal background component but it should not be used for background estimates if small scale structure is important The DIRBE images do provide reliable background estimates for the Galactic and extragalactic background components and are accurate for the zodiacal light background expected if you observe your target at 90 solar elongation However if you observe your target near the inner edge of the OPZ at 80 solar elongation the real zodiacal light values could be higher by approximately 20 If the object is observed at the outer edge of the OPZ at 120 solar elongation the real zodiacal light values could be fainter by 50
13. Put plot in new Frame Where Put plot in current Frame Three Color Plots _ Make this a 3 Color Plot Color Band Red Y File Name SPITZER_I1_5504000_0_1_E224586_msaic fits Files of Type ms Files fits E Cancel Figure 22 The image selection dialog for reading in a local FITS file This utility will also read in gzipped FITS files and FITS files with extensions You can enter the initial zoom level You can also create three color RGB image composites 7 6 10 FITS file from URL Spot can also now display FITS images available from any web based image server for which an address can be specified by a Universal Record Locator URL Spot also reads gzipped FITS files and FITS files with extensions There must be world coordinate system keywords in the header for the positional information to be accurately read Data June 18 2008 31 Spot User s Guide v18 from most modern telescopes should be handled well Note that the available computer system memory limits the size of a FITS image that may be loaded into Spot Loading large FITS images may compromise the memory left available for other Spot functions The images selection dialog is shown in Figure 23 oc Fits File URL Enter the URL of the FITs file cans ular sings 20070410_enhanced_v1 ngc5 194 IRAC ngc5194_v7 phot 4 fits Three Color Plots Make this a 3 Color Plot Color Band Cancel oK
14. 4 3 Linux RedHat 8 0 9 0 Fedora Core Enterprise Spot on Linux runs acceptably on RedHat 8 0 9 0 We tested each distribution straight out of the box We ran the GNOME windowing environment We know that Spot does NOT run properly with the fvwm2 window manager all JAVA Swing programs seemed to hang or KDE Spot did seem to run OK with the older fvwm window manager but our testing was only cursory Spot also appears to run well under Fedora Core although we have not yet fully tested Fedora Core 4 or 5 Undoubtedly there will be various Linux OS under which Spot will not run successfully For example we are not supporting Spitzer Pride for 64 bit Linux machines You will need to install the generic package and download your own Java see the Installation webpage 4 4 Mac OSX Spot requires JAVA 1 5 so Mac OS 10 4 or 10 5 are required Note Spot will not run under Mac OS 10 3 Apple offers JAVA 1 5 JAVA 2 Standard Edition J2SE 5 0 as a software update By now nearly all Mac OS 10 4 or 10 5 systems should be running JAVA 1 5 unless you have not allowed software updates to run over a year or so You may need system administration privileges for software installation June 18 2008 9 Spot User s Guide v18 5 Installing and Starting Spot Part of Spitzer Pride With this release we continue the tradition of Spitzer Pride Spot V18 and Leopard V9 Spot and Leopard share many of the same JAVA files and so are
15. AOT TYPE IRAC Mapping AOR_LABEL IRAC Map AOR_STATUS new CJ MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPI FIXED SINGLE Kal TARGET NAME A Target Galactic COORD SYSTEM Galactic POSITION RA_LON 40 50000000d DEC _LAT 31 32000000d OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES READOUT MODE FULL ARRAY ARRAY 3 6 5 8u YES 4 5 8 0u YES HI DYNAMIC N STELLAR MODE N FRAME TIME 12 DITHER PATTERN TYPE Cycling N POSITION 5 START POINT 1 DITHER SCALE large 100 RECTANGULAR ROWS 5 COLS 5 ROW STEP 260 0 COL STEP 260 0 ORIENT ARRAY ROW OFFSET 0 0 COL_OFFSET 0 0 N_CYCLE 1 PECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS MO SECOND LOOK NO EST TOTAL DURATION 3339 4 SLEW TIME 733 0 E 594 0 SLEW OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 E 5600 DOWNLINK VOLUME 38101518 VERSION S18 0 1 z Q Al D 4 CH Es lt F RAC 3 6 60 0 IRAC 4 5 60 0 IRAC 5 8 60 0 IRAC 8 0 60 0 ENT S TART Enter comments here ENT_END June 18 2008 180 Spot User s Guide v18 AOT TYPE IRAC Mapping AOR_LABEL IRAC Map HDR Celestial AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME A Target Galactic COORD SYSTEM Galactic POSITION RA_LON 40 50000000d DEC _LAT 31 3
16. As a new feature in Spot this tool will generate statistics from an image i e the maximum minimum mean and integrated fluxes as well as the flux centroid and flux weighted centroid within either a circular or rectangular user specified area See section 15 1 7 Clicking on the icon in the image and overlay manipulation tool bar will activate this tool 7 7 7 Mark Object on Plot User Created Catalog This tool allows to you selectively mark and label points of interest on your image plot An example is shown in section 16 3 2 You can save the marks to a catalog file in IPAC table format to local disk This user created catalog later can be read back into Spot to overlay see section 7 7 1 3 Clicking on the icon in the image and overlay manipulation tool bar will activate this tool 7 7 8 Current Fixed Target Spot places a red box onto the current fixed target position in the displayed images It also marks each offset position in celestial coordinates with a red plus sign if you have a June 18 2008 38 Spot User s Guide v18 cluster target type Clicking on the icon in the image and overlay manipulation tool bar will activate this utility O Show all moving objects at epoch Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Target Target List Parameters Epoch Date 2007 Dec 1 Epoch Time 00 00 00 Radius Degrees D 1 0 Help Cancel OK C Na
17. Flux Density Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Figure 85 IRS Staring Mode AOT also showing the PCRS Peak up mode June 18 2008 94 Spot User s Guide v18 If the local background is too bright the tool may fail to find a suitable 2MASS star for peak up If the background is too bright and therefore too structured IRS peak up might fail for faint stars such as those just above 10 mJy If the Spot calculated surface brightness at 100 um is gt 50 MJy sr and the user decides to enter a lower value the tool will continue to perform a search but the selection of peak up stars may be compromised for the same reason stated above That is attempting to fool the peak up selection tool by entering an unreasonably low background surface brightness and then requesting one of the returned 2MASS stars as a peak up target may result in the failure of the peak up when executed We recommend that you not do this Note The proper motions of objects are not available in the 2MASS catalog If you have selected a peak up star from the 2MASS catalog proper motion must be included This is particularly important for peak ups on 2MASS stars with high proper motions Proper motions must be obtained from another source such as the Tycho 2 catalog If you have not included proper motion you will now be warned that proper motions must be included for 2MASS peak up stars see Figure 84 You
18. G F v Instrument v Duration Stat v On Target m31 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 6 1 Figure 51 An example showing a custom display of columns turned off or on using the columns control feature toward the upper right corner of the AORs table The small icon in the upper right hand corner yellow button O in the upper left hand corner for Macs will iconify the Observations window and leave the Spot screen clear The slightly larger icon in the upper right hand corner green button in the upper left hand corner for Macs will minimize and E maximize the area of the Spot screen covered by the Observations window The icon in the upper right corner of the AORs table in the Observations window allows you to control which columns appear in the window An example is shown in Figure 51 When you click on the icon the menu of June 18 2008 57 Spot User s Guide v18 available columns appears toward the right side of the window Simply toggle on or off any of the columns by clicking next to the column name In the example in the figure we have turned off the Follow on Constraint and Status columns To restore all columns to be displayed in the window click on the Reset table to Factory settings option 8 3 Bottom Bar At the bottom of the main screen Spot provides information about the currently selected target as well as information about the status of the network and the total amount of time to execute al
19. No of Days Delta Time 1 Time Delta Time 12 00 00 Constraint Name Group 0001 Figure 107 The dialog for creating a Group Within constraint is opened from the constraint editor dialog by clicking the Add Group Within button In this example the AORs will be executed within a 36 hour time period specified as one day plus 12 hours Spot will warn you if the total duration of your AORs exceeds the amount of time you select in the constraint 13 3 4 Linking AORs to a Grouping Constraint After creating the Sequence Chain or Group Within constraint you are ready to specify which AORs are included in this constraint There are two methods for doing this 1 Drag and drop In the main AOR table click on the desired AOR and keep the mouse button pressed drag your cursor to the appropriate constraint name in the constraints dialog and release the cursor to add the AOR to the constraint Repeat this process to add additional AORs 2 Get AOR button First click on the constraint to which you want to add AORs Next in the AOR table click on the AOR you want to link to the constraint Then click the Get AOR button in the Perform Actions section of the constraints dialog see Figure 109 to add the AOR to the constraint Repeat the process to link additional AORs to the constraint After linking four AORs to the Sequence 0000 constraint the constraint dialog will look like Figure 109 June 18 2008 115 Spo
20. Target Geminga_background Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 0 5 Figure 94 The main Observations window showing that the target and the sky background IRS Staring AORs for high resolution observations have been constrained as a group see section 13 3 You can choose to skip generating the sky background or in this example proceed in generating a background AOR automatically You can of course still generate the sky background AOR manually June 18 2008 102 Spot User s Guide v18 eoe Constraint Editor Constraint Editor Tool Add Constraint then Drag AORs to Constraint Window d Group Follow On Shadow Add Constraints Parameters Add Sequencing 3 Add Group Within Modify Paramete C Add Chaining 3 Add AOR Timing 3 Add Comments Perform Action e Remove J Get AOR Move Up 3 Move Down Drag RORII Constraints Y 1 2 B IRS BGC IRSS 0000 Total Duration 00 27 26 IRSS 0000_background IRSS 0000 Help Cancel Apply Lo Gan Figure 95 Opening the Constraint Editor Tool shows that the target and background AORs are automatically chained You can modify the parameters of this constraint in this dialog See section 13 3 for more explanation on setting and editing constraints IRS Peakup Imaging Unique AOR Label IRSI 0000 Target m31 Type Fixed
21. button in the AOT window to bring up this dialog The table can be saved to local disk June 18 2008 84 Spot User s Guide v18 A new feature in the IRAC AOT is the ability to obtain a table of predicted positions of the central pointings for each of the image frames for each channel produced by an AOR This table an example of which is shown in Figure 73 can also be saved as an ASCII file to local disk Click on the Exposures button in the AOT window to bring up this dialog 608 IRAC Mapping Unique AOR Label IRAC 0000 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Tar Target List Instrument Settings Readout Mode Field of View For each Pointing Full Array M 3 6um Number of Frames 1 times 64 frames J High Dynamic Range KE 4 5um Stellar Mode M 5 8 um Frame Time secs Zei Subarray v 8 0 um Mapping and Dithering sa Mapping Mode No mg Dither Pattern fei No 3 Yes Flux Density L Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Exposures Help Cancel OK Figure 74 IRAC Subarray mode dialog 11 1 1 Subarray Mode The Subarray mode for the IRAC AOT looks somewhat different from the Full Array and HDR modes As shown in Figure 74 for each selected field of view one or more series of 64 short exposure frames can be obtained The short frame times can be selected from th
22. ie Base Image E m 3 MIPST Ring Parts e EE SSES B mips 24 V Show Parallel Data Help Done M Observations Ring Nebula Target Ring Nebula Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 4 4 Figure 169 Example of a MIPS Total Power TP Mode AOR overlay on a DSS image of the Ring Nebula Details of the AOR are given above Note that to show parallel data for each channel you need to click the Show Parallel Data box in the focal plane configuration dialog see text 15 8 List of the Spitzer Fields of View Below we provide a listing of the Spitzer Fields of View FOVs that will be displayed in the AOR overlays see section 7 7 12 and e g Figure 158 These are the positions defined in the focal plane where pointings are centered IRS_Red_Peak Up_FOV_Center Center of Red peak up array FOV IRS_Red_Peak Up_FOV_Sweet_Spot Sweet Spot for Red peak up array FOV IRS_Blue_Peak Up_FOV_Center Center of Blue peak up array FOV IRS_Blue_Peak Up_FOV_Sweet_Spot Sweet Spot for Blue peak up array FOV IRS_ Short Lo Let Order Let Position Shortest Position on the 7 4 14 5 um slit IRS_Short Lo_lst_Order_2nd_ Position Longest Position on the 7 4 14 5 um slit IRS_Short Lo_1lst_Order Center Position Center Position on the 7 4 14 5 um slit IRS_Short Lo_2nd_Order_lst_ Position Shortest Position on the 5 2 8 7 um slit IRS_Short Lo_2nd Order 2nd Position Longest Position on the 5 2 8 7 um slit IRS_Short Lo_2nd_
23. in the same frame overlaid as in Overlay gt Image Overlays from the Spot menus The color table control icon brings up a dialog allowing you to adjust the color table for the image The side bar contains the controls of image and overlay layers You can create several layers and then hide or show them with the show hide layer icons without having to recreate them each time Each overlay introduces a new layer control box on the side bar The Base Image layer does not need to be the bottom layer You can move it between other overlays in the frame by clicking on any part of the layer control box and dragging it between layers to where you want it 15 1 5 Three Color Image Display Spot provides you with the ability to produce three color composite image display for overlays The three images are read individually into the red green and blue RGB color planes to produce the composite To produce a composite first select an image June 18 2008 137 Spot User s Guide v18 eee Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z I I DEBR GH AlAl lg w w w oy We lll Mouse Control gt Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Any L Si chl_mosaic fits Leda Base Image sis Add Color red Add Color green xaje EAN AA ae Target m51 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 142 A single FITS image in this case the Spitzer S
24. ECT AVOIDANCE ARTH ULL ARRAY 45u Y 45u Y E Gaussian5 POINTING CTANGULAR RAY ROW OFFS PACT none SOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION TTLE TIME 532 0 J T SLI 15 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 PO N SLEW OVE AOR_STATUS new TARGI T TYPE ET NO p n l NAME DI EI R DIT E 5831 DOWNLIN FIXED SINGLE A Target _ EM Ecliptic J2000 el 18 2008 ES PI IM Kal ADOUT MODE ARRAY DATA COLLECTION HI DYNAMIC FRAME TIME ER PATTERN DITHER_ SCALE GI RA _LON 5 00000000d EARTH 45u Y 45u Y R _POINTING PACT none Kal Spot User s Guide v18 Mapping GI GI nn ROW STEP 260 0 COL STEP 260 0 0 0 COL_OFFSET 0 0 N CYCLE 1 NO SECOND LOOK NO WW TIME 558 2 S i E E 37799000 VERSION S18 0 1 EGRATION TIME IRAC 3 6 30 0 IRAC 4 5 30 0 IRAC_5 8 0 0 IRAC 8 0 0 0 PE IRAC Post Cryo Mapping FL IRACPC Subarray Ecliptic 2000 DEC LAT 5 00000000d YES E SubGaussian4 NO SECOND LOOK NO 191 L Spot User s Guide v18 ERHEAD 0 0 UPLINK VOLUM NTEGRATION TIME RAC 3 6 512 0 IRAC A 5 512 0 I June 18 2008 RAC 5 8 0 0 IRAC 8 0 0 0
25. when compared with the value read from the map If accurate background estimates are crucial for your observation we STRONGLY recommend that you use the values obtained from Background button in the Target window June 18 2008 32 Spot User s Guide v18 7 6 12 Blank Image Spot can also now provide a blank background image on which to display overlays see section 7 7 The width and height in pixels of the blank image can be specified The pixel scale can be set as either the native Depth of Coverage overlay pixel scale the 2MASS image pixel scale the ISSA plate scale or any other pixel scale you specify The images selection dialog is shown in Figure 25 ee Blank Image Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Target Target List Pixel Size Where Other specify below Put plot in new Frame Depth of Coverage scale 0 0025 deg pixel Put plot in current Frame 2mass scale 0 0002777 deg pixel ISSA scale 0 025 deg pixel SZ Pixel size deg pixel 0 002500 Width in pixels 400 Height in pixels 400 Three Color Plots Make this a 3 Color Plot Color Band _ Red Help Cancel OK Figure 25 The selection dialog for specifying a blank image You can select the size of the image in pixels as well as the pixel scale You can create three color RGB image composites 7 7 Overlays Menu 7 7 4 Catalog Overlay 7 7 1 1 Catalogs fr
26. Click Apply 6 Continue this process until you have created all of the AORs that want with this tool June 18 2008 110 Spot User s Guide v18 13 Constraints Editing 13 1 Description Spot allows you to create TIMING and GROUPING constraints by selecting Timing Constraints or Group Follow on Constraints from the Tools menu When you save your AORs each timing constraint will be saved with the appropriate AOR and the grouping constraints will be written out at the end of the AOR file A constraints must be scientifically justified in your proposal for telescope time It is recommended that you complete all of your AORs before adding Grouping or Follow on constraints that link them This will lower the probability of your constraints becoming invalid due to changes made to the AORs included in the constraints ee AOR Timing _Timing Windows UT AOR Name m31 IRAC map Start date Start time End date End time 2008 Jan 20 03 00 00 2008 Feb 13 05 30 00 0 2008 Aug 25 00 00 00 2008 Sep 30 13 35 15 Y Visibility Windows Window Open Window Close Duration days 2003 Aug 26 00 05 00 2003 Aug 28 06 16 00 2 3 2003 Dec 17 07 07 00 2004 Jan 31 09 12 00 45 1 2004 Jul 15 17 09 00 2004 Aug 31 20 15 00 47 1 2004 Dec 22 05 06 00 2005 Feb 05 17 35 00 45 5 2005 Jul 23 00 38 00 2005 Sep 08 06 07 00 47 2 2005 Dec 29 19 27 00 2006 Feb 13 09 34 00 45 6 2006 Jul 30 20 53 00 2006 Sep 16 03 10 00 47 3 2007 Jan 06 18 08 00 2007 Feb 21 08 48 0
27. Color lt Short Low 7 4 14 2 Color lt Short high Color RI Long Low 14 2 21 8 1 Color 3 Long Low 20 6 40 0 Color z Long high Color IRS Peak up Red Color IRS Peak up Blue Color Figure 35 The configuration of the focal plane overlay is controlled from this dialog You can select the colors of the instrument fields of view overlays and also select which FOVs are shown The pull down menu at the bottom allows you to select which instrument FOV will be centered on the image where you click the mouse To change the colors of the instrument fields of view FOV where the focal plane is centered and which instrument fields of view are shown click the focal plane configuration icon El in the Spitzer Layer box on the sidebar This brings up the dialog shown in Figure 35 You can turn off on any instrument fields of view or change their display colors here To select which FOV in the focal plane is centered where you click the mouse use the pull down menu at the bottom of this dialog A listing of the FOVs is given in section 15 8 Click on the diffraction spikes icon EIS display the spikes The diffraction spikes move and rotate when you move or rotate the Spitzer focal plane An example is shown in section 16 3 5 7 7 13 Generic Focal Plane This tool allows you to overlay a user specified square or circular focal plane onto yo
28. EXPOSURE TIME 14 N CYCLES SEQ 1 SPECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO RESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 1472 1482 SLEW TIME 84 6 SETTLE TIME 60 648228 SLEW OVERHEAD 515 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 UPLINK VOLUME 1324 DOWNLINK VOLUME 4438492 VERSION S18 0 1 INTEGRATION TIME IRS HI 10 12 582912 IRS HI_19 121 89696 IRS LO 5 121 89696 IRS LO 7 121 89696 IRS LO 14 29 360128 IRS LO 20 29 360128 COMMENT START This illustrates the peak up option for moving targets using a fixed single target Here the dummy position for the science target from the Horizons database of a visibility window appropriate for this dummy position actual moving target COMM Enck ENT _END June 18 2008 is fo r 2006 Aug 1 00 00 00 UT obtained which is near the mid point After selecting a 2MASS peak up star then reselect your science target Encke as th 185 Spot User s Guide v18 AOT TYPE RS Peakup Image AOR_LABEL RS Peak up Imaging 16 and 22 microns AOR_STATUS new za HH MOVING TARGET YES TARGET TYPE MOVING SINGLE TARGET NAME New TNO EPHEMERIS EPOCH 2451325 5 T 2450131 5 LITTLE OMEGA 281 130004882812 BIG OMEGA 78 839996337891 ECCENTRICITY 0 315406709909 PERIHELION DISTANCE 8 159799575806 INCLINATION OF ORBIT 5 960000038147 OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS NO
29. Geen Spitzer Space Telescope See Spot Run Spot User s Guide Spitzer Planning Observations Tool 18 June 18 2008 Issued by the Spitzer Science Center California Institute of Technology Pasadena California USA http ssc spitzer caltech edu Spitzer ocience Center 4 Spot User s Guide v18 Table of Contents Ih Totrod ctiom a na ama aku ua E ain cts TE T 2 Whats New EE 8 3 Minimum Recommended Hardware Configuration 8 3 1 Sun Workstations Sun Ultra 5 with 256 MB RAM n annuns 8 3 2 Windows PC 2000 NT XP 512 MB RAM a nnnnsssssnnnnsssssssssssss 8 3 3 Windows PC Vistaycl GB RAM ua qana aaa a qu aq Sq u usu 8 3 4 Linux PG 256 MB RAM aeriana r err E EE E EE E EE E EE EE EE EEEE ETRE 8 3 5 Mac PC OS 10 4 512 MB RAM OS 10 5 1 GB RAM sssssssssssssssssrsesesessrsssesesesesesesesesrseseseseseses 9 4 Operating System Configurations Supported 9 A SUNPKS Solars 2 842 atas unn A AA T T R E E OOE 9 42 Windows NT 2000 XP Vista 9 43 Linux RedHat 8 0 9 0 Fedora Core Enterprise oo cceceseseeseeseeseeseeeeecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecaesseeseeaeeaes 9 AAP Na EE 9 5 Installing and Starting Spot Part of Spitzer Pride 10 ah Windows Installation fu h nn u A u SQ ua aqa wS aa usus 10 52 Solaris or Linux An stall ations y y a E pa a eege teas 10 53 Mac Installat
30. Perform Action Remove Get AOR Move Up Move Down Drop AORs onstraints l 2 Shadow Encke Total Duration 00 33 26 IRSS Encke IRSS Encke_Shadow Cancel Figure 61 Shadow constraint editor window After clicking on Add Shadow drag your two replicated AORs from the AOR list into this window Then click on Modify Parameters Note that execution of the shadow observation AFTER the primary is the default As with all observing constraints the need for a shadow constraint must be scientifically justified Shadows specified to execute BEFORE the primary observation are much more difficult to schedule than shadows executed after the primary and require even more compelling scientific justification in the proposal than shadows executed after the primary Parameters Number of Days start 3 Number of Days end 4 Time start 06 00 00 Time end 06 00 00 Constraint Name Shacow Encke Shadow Before Primary Figure 62 Specifying parameters for a shadow constraint The displayed set of parameters requests that Spitzer execute the shadow after the primary Shadow before Primary box is NOT checked and that the second AOR in this case the shadow is executed between 3 days and 6 hours and 4 days and 6 hours after the first AOR the primary June 18 2008 73 Spot User s Guide v18 The
31. TTLE TIME 594 0 SLEW OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 LINK VOLUME 5582 DOWNLINK VOLUME 56698750 VERSION S18 0 1 NTEGRATION TIME RAC_3_6 20 0 TRAC_4 5 20 0 IRAC_5 8 60 0 IRAC_8 0 60 0 Gl We nO JI DI D H E P H H G o m COMMENT START This is Stellar Mode COMMENT END June 18 2008 182 Spot User s Guide v18 AOT TYPE IRS Staring AOR LABEL IRS Peak up Only AOR STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGL TARGET NAME Test Target COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 1h02m03 00000s DEC _LAT 4d05m06 0000s PM RA 0 0 PM DEC 0 0 EPOCH 2000 0 OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES GI d Di d 4 IS BACKGROUND AOR NO IRS PEAK UP OPTION MODERATE FILTER BLUE RA OFFSET 5 199999809265137 DEC OFFSET 10 699999809265137 FLUX DENSITY 32 5 EXTENDED SOURCE NO MODE PEAK UP ONLY PECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO ESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 362 9482 SLEW TIME 1 5 ETTLE TIME 5 6482263 SLEW OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 PLINK VOLUME 529 DOWNLINK VOLUME 246582 VERSION S18 0 1 NTEGRATION TIME RS_HI_10 0 0 IRS HI _19 0 0 IRS LO 5 0 0 IRS LO _7 0 0 IRS_LO 14 0 0 IRS LO 20 0 0 Ens
32. W for the short low slit points up and W for both high resolution slits points toward the center of the focal plane An IRAC column and the MIPS in scan direction run vertically in this picture An IRAC row and the MIPS cross scan direction run horizontally in this picture 10 9 Estimating the Sky Background To plan your Spitzer observing program one of the important ingredients is the absolute brightness of the sky at the time of your observation To judge the feasibility of detection of astronomical sources in the presence of strong foreground signals from the zodiacal light and interstellar cirrus the observer requires knowledge of the background sky level relative to the astronomical source of interest The SSC provides tools for estimating the sky background levels for your target It should be taken into consideration that Spot does not remember the sky background levels when creating AORs thus it is the responsibility of the observer to take these into consideration while designing their AORs 10 9 1 IRAS Sky Maps If you are interested in the few arcminute scale structure of the sky brightness the best source is the IRAS sky maps ISSA You can examine these by displaying your target region from the Images menu section 7 6 1 These are the same maps that you can obtain from IRSKY http www ipac caltech edu ipac services irsky irsky html Note that these maps have had zodiacal light contributions removed and may not pr
33. Windows ME c spot Windows NT 2000 XP c Documents and Settings username Application Data Spot Windows Vista c Users username AppData Roaming spot The text showing in any error windows that pop up in Spot should show up in the logfile as well 7 Spot Menus Spot has ten menus that provide the tools needed to create your AORs Section 7 11 gives a single page summary of all the Spot menu items The menus provide the following functions 7 1 File Menu File I O is handled from this menu 7 1 1 Open AORs and Targets ctrl O This function opens a dialog to select a file of targets or AORs that has previously been written out with Spot AOR and target files are plain ASCII text files created by Spot with the formatting required by the software Spot expects AOR files to have the suffix aor and Spot target files to have the suffix tgt Sample files illustrating the format required for targets and AORs are included in sections 17 and 18 respectively The Read AORs and Targets dialog is shown in Figure 4 You can browse directories and select a target or AOR file from the list or type in the name Note that the directory structure in the dialog is now compatible with the default Mac OSX directory structure June 18 2008 13 Spot User s Guide v18 At the right side or bottom of the dialog you can select the method Spot should use for handling duplicate AORs i e if an AOR file you are reading in contains an A
34. by Spot with the required formatting Sample files illustrating the format required for targets and AORs are included in sections 17 and 18 respectively When writing out AOR files you can either write out all of your AORs or a subset of files for which you have set the ON flag It is important that you save your AORs before exiting Spot otherwise your work will be lost Spot does not save AORs or targets to disk automatically If you do not select a directory in which to save your files the default directory is Solaris Linux Mac home lt username gt spot Windows 95 98 ME c spot Windows NT 2000 XP c Documents and Settings username Application Data Spot Windows Vista c Users username AppData Roaming spot June 18 2008 14 Spot User s Guide v18 When you select Save AORs and Targets the dialog shown in Figure 5 opens The default function for this dialog is to save AORs to a file The default file Spot creates is named newfile aor If you include the aor suffix in the File name Spot will still create the filename newfile aor If you read in a file of AORs and save them to a new file name the file name in the lower left corner of the Spot window will not change It continues to show the last AOR file that was read into Spot A sample AOR file is shown in section 18 Save AOR s and Target s Save In spot 7 a ea Els
35. etc If June 18 2008 97 Spot User s Guide v18 this capability is chosen however remember that the peak up capability will NOT be able to compensate for any errors in the target ephemeris you must make sure that the ephemeris is as accurate as possible To use this new capability a small amount of preparation work is required in Horizons and Spot First determine the visibility window in which you would like to observe your target with Spot or with Horizons using solar elongation clipping at 82 to 120 Then use Horizons to return the time dependent astrometric RA and Dec for your target as viewed by Spitzer over that window Table Quantity 1 in Horizons see Horizons Tips for Spitzer Solar System Observers on the SSC Proposal Kit webpage for details Note that the astrometric RA and Dec will appear in the Spitzer data headers Select a date near the middle of the visibility window unless the extreme apparent motion of your target the presence of a nearby bright object or adverse sky background precludes this For this mid date enter the RA and Dec into Spot using the fixed target entry window see section 10 1 1 Ignore proper motion Your moving target is now a dummy fixed target See Figure 87 Select a peak up star for your dummy target from the IRS Peak Up option Select the desired peak up accuracy and array Make sure that your dummy fixed target is the target in the AOR window Continue by following the steps out
36. lt gt Help Done Figure 152 The table of the data in the catalog overlay shown on the right in Figure 151 You can manipulate which objects are marked and how they look from this dialog The constrain data icon will bring up a dialog with sliders which allow you to easily select the range of data to display or to exclude for your table for a gtven data field An example is shown in Figure 153 that selects K band magnitudes between 11 and 16 O WE Data Field K Magnitude ES Direction Show Values between zs gt Minimum Se SSS RA OE REY Se Hl 5 621 14 383 21 751 Maximum 5 621 14 383 21 751 Show K Magnitude between11 032 amp 15 999 Help Done Figure 153 This dialog allows you to select the ranges of the data in the table currently displayed in the overlay This example selects K band sources with magnitudes between about 11 and 16 June 18 2008 145 Spot User s Guide v18 15 5 Overlaying an Image It is possible to overlay one image onto another by selecting Image Overlays in the Overlays pulldown menu Once you have selected your base image from the Images pulldown menu the Image Overlays menu allows you to select another image either ISSA 2MASS MSX DSS SkyView NED or a user selected FITS image from local disk to overlay on the base image The opacity of each image can be controlled using the opacity control dialog that pops up when you press the oi icon in the layer control box fo
37. lt No Science Category Information gt Figure 128 Part of the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window after adding the Scientific Justification file information to the proposal 14 7 Add Science Category Information This button allows you to choose a broad science category into which you feel your proposal fits Note that these are not keywords You can choose at most one science category from at most one of the broad Extragalactic Galactic or Solar System categories Figure 129 A warning dialog Figure 130 will pop up if you have chosen more than one category or no category at all click OK to continue and select a category Select Science Category Extragalactic galaxy clusters and groups low z galaxy clusters and groups high z Solar System ULIRGS LIRGS HLIRGS GRBs cosmic infrared background extragalactic jets dark matter Ok starburst galaxies Figure 129 Proposal Submission Tool Science Categories You can choose at most one from one of the types Extragalactic Galactic Solar System Shown is the pull down menu for Extragalactic Galactic You must select one science category Figure 130 Warning message that appears if you try to select more than one science category for your proposal or no category at all June 18 2008 128 Spot User s Guide v18 When you have finished choosing the appropriate Science Category click the OK butt
38. once for sorting up twice for down and a third click will return you to the original order of the catalog The color and shape scheme for the catalog overlay allow a few kinds of selecting and highlighting so some explanation is needed When a catalog is overlaid all the objects marks in the catalog are On checked in the On box and shown with the default red color Clicking on a line in the catalog will activate that object s mark as selected The color of that object s mark will change to yellow the selected color Clicking on another line in the catalog will turn the color of that object s mark to yellow and the first object s mark will change color back to what it was previously You can highlight certain objects in the catalog by clicking on the Hi box for the object At first the object s mark will turn yellow the selected color since you clicked on it When you click on another object in the catalog the first object s mark will turn blue the highlight color Both the selected and highlighted colors of object s marks appear when the object is On On box is checked If you Hide All or otherwise turn off various objects in your catalog selecting or highlighting them will not turn the marks back on with the appropriate color June 18 2008 143 Spot User s Guide v18 3G Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool lg Sid e a Es gg
39. to zoom the image 4 Go to the Encke icons on the right and bring up the ephemeris window by clicking on the list icon E Click Show All Dates Note that Encke takes a little over two months to cross this 5 ISSA image But how far is it traveling e Ei SS i Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool ER joze Bi a aje EB sss ZZ Left Mouse Button Select a point on the Image Shift Left Button Center the Image at point IN Serene Mouse Control Mouse Encke ISSA 25 micron Encke Target Encke Type Moving Sie Ge Total Duration hrs 0 3 Figure 180 The 5x5 IRAC Map discussed above is shown Note that the map may show a slight zig zag shape due to movement of the target during the observation 5 Select the Distance Tool from the Overlays menu Using the left mouse button click at one date on the traJectory e g 2006 Jul 22 and drag approximately to the next shown date to the left 2006 July 25 Click on the Encke check mark to toggle off the traJectory June 18 2008 173 Spot User s Guide v18 and dates so that you can read the distance off the display The distance value can also be read by clicking on the Distance overlay table icon 6 Click the Encke trajectory back on and the distances line off Go into the Encke list icon and Hide all dates or select just a few for display 7 Click on the IRAC AOT icon at the top of t
40. 0 MAP CENTER OFFSET CROSS SCAN 0 IN SCAN 0 BACKWARD MAP NO owe ___ Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool ewiaAlai eisRelsalse M Mouse Control SS SI Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Any 31 Te ee 2MASS j Ring Nebula Ud MISE Ring Eixle e e Base Image E x ziala Observations JE 2MASS j Ring Nebula W iSSA 60 micron Ring Nebula Target Ring Nebula Type Fixed Single H Figure 168 Example of a MIPS SED AOR overlay on a 2MASS J band image and an ISSA 60 um image of the Ring Nebula Details of the AOR are given above Total Duration hrs 3 7 15 7 9 MIPS SED AOR The sample MIPS SED AOR uses the 70 um array and spectrometer slit of MIPS to perform a small map around the target The AOR file is shown at the end of this section We use an image of the Ring Nebula simply to illustrate the overlay After creating the AOR and displaying the images we select Current AOR from the Overlays menu The area coverage for the SED AOR is now displayed in Figure 168 June 18 2008 159 Spot User s Guide v18 Only an approximate 2 x 24 pixel area is illuminated The off position observations chop 1 is seen just above the on target observations Note The overlay of the SED slit will appear somewhat offset relative to the position of the current target This is a known bug in the overlay only wh
41. 18 2008 42 Spot User s Guide v18 7 7 15 Read AOR Overlay Mapping File You can save the pointings table for an AOR overlay to local disk see section 15 7 2 This file can be read back into Spot at a later time for overlaying on images The dialog for reading the file into Spot is shown in Figure 39 Currently only the overlay for one AOR at a time can be read in This feature however is intended to make AOR overlays more convenient and to be a time saver when planning out your observations Read AOR Overlay Mapping File Look in C spot E ale E Ez y m31_irac pts File Name m31_irac pts Files of Type Pointings File pts sl Open Cancel L Figure 39 The dialog for reading in a user specified AOR map file eee i Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool SelologggesgeelAlaleeielslwlalee le I A is Ga Ir Mouse Control 5 2 SES Shift Lefi Button Center the Image at point Mouse Any 34 eoe All Sky Image DIRBE 60 micron Base Image ARSESE IE AAN B Observations B All Sky Image DIRBE 60 micron Target None Specified Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 40 An overlay of the Spitzer Operational Pointing Zone OPZ on the All Sky image for the middate 2006 Sep 12 of the effective mission window June 18 2008 43 Spot User s Guide v18 7 7 16 Show Spitzer OPZ The OPZ is the Operational Poi
42. 21 EPOCH 2000 0 ECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES REQUIRE 160 YES SCAN_RATE medium FAST RESET 160 NO STEP SIZE TURNAROUND 35 FORWARD 35 N SCAN LEGS 6 N_ MAP CYCLES 1 SCAN LEG LENGTH 2 5 MAP CENTER OFFSET CROSS SCAN 0 IN SCAN 0 BACKWARD MAP YES SPECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO RESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 10342 932 SLEW_TIME 36 2 SETTLE TIME 63 331657 SLEW _OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 UP INK_VOLUME 1194 DOWNLINK VOLUME 223124562 VERSION S18 0 1 INTEGRATION TIME MIPS 24 41 9 MIPS 70 41 9 MIPS 160 4 2 COMMENT START Enter comments here COMMENT END AOT TYPE MIPS Total Power AOR_LABEL MIPS Total Power AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME Test Target COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 1h02m03 00000s DEC _LAT 4d05m06 0000s PM RA 0 0 PM DEC 0 0 EPOCH 2000 0 OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES MICRON 24 EXPOSURE TIME 10 N_CYCLES 4 MICRON 70 EXPOSURE TIME 10 N_ CYCLES 4 MICRON 160 EXPOSURE TIME 10 N CYCLES 4 Co Om OURCE EST INK_VOLUM ECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS
43. 2MASS K band images 15 1 Displaying and Manipulating Images To visualize the sky at a target position you can go directly to the Images menu and select the appropriate sky image s In sections 7 6 1 and 7 6 2 we showed how to download IRAS Sky Survey Atlas ISSA and Two Micron All Sky Survey MASS images In Figure 141 we show what the Spot screen would look like after downloading an ISSA 25 um image and a 2MASS K band image The frame with the ISSA image is the currently active frame If you display multiple images within a frame the tabs along the bottom of the frame allow you to toggle between the images in the frame 15 1 1 Image Control To zoom the image in or out use the A NN icons on the left of the Spot window Figure 141 see also Figure 49 The icon zooms in and the A icon zooms June 18 2008 136 Spot User s Guide v18 out The and s icons apply the zoom to all the images in the selected The l icon centers the current image in the frame To move the image around in the frame you can use the scroll bars on the frame or move the positioning box on the thumbnail image 15 1 2 Image Window Control When using the visualization tools we suggest that you maximize your Spot window to fill your computer screen The displayed image space can then be maximized by clicking on the maximize icon ET in the upper right hand corner of the image frame Clicking on the E icon will minimize the image space the Mac eq
44. 3 A tool tip is displayed by placing the cursor over the bulls eye icon This icon brings up the dialog for creating a new target MV 6 3 Time Estimates In calculating the time estimates we have used all the information available to date about the instruments and flight software performance We expect that these estimates are good to at least 10 of the total AOR duration or wall clock time Spot reports the following when you request an observing time estimate 1 AOR Duration This is the wall clock time or total time required to execute the observation including time on source internal calibrations slewing settling command execution and the fixed slew overhead applied to each AOR This is the time you must request in your proposal for this observation 2 Slew Time The time spent on slews internal to the AOR 3 Settle Time The time required for the telescope to settle after slews internal to the AOR 4 Slew Overhead A 215 second overhead applied to all AORs to account for the initial slew to source and other observatory overheads 5 Moving Target Overhead A 300 second special overhead is included in the slew overhead for moving targets 6 Integration Time s Estimated on source integration time s in seconds Spot v18 returns observing time estimates from AIRE for all of the AOTs 6 4 Maximum Duration of AORs The duration limits for all AORs are 3 hours for MIPS and 8 hours for IRAC and
45. 4 Ifyou click Apply or OK the new AORs will be created Apply leaves the dialog window open so that you can continue editing and do more replications OK creates the AORs and closes the dialog NOTE If you click Apply and create your AORs and then click OK Spot will be asking if you want to create the duplicates AGAIN To create just one set of duplicated AORs use OK when you are ready to duplicate them or click Apply followed by Cancel when you are finished 12 2 Target Replication Tool The Target Replication Tool allows Spot to automatically create a number of AORs by merging a set of AORs with a list of targets It creates an AOR with the selected target for each AOR in the set To use the Target Replication Tool June 18 2008 109 Spot User s Guide v18 1 Enter your targets into Spot and open the target list 2 Create the set of AORs that you want for one of the targets 3 Select the Target Replication Tool from the Tools menu 4 Select a new target from the target list 5 Drag the AORs that you want replicated into the window By clicking and dragging on the AOR s you may change the current target to be what it is in the template AOR This is easy to work around After you have dragged all the desired AORs into the replication window open the target list under Targets or click the target button and select the target you want It should appear in the Template Target field in the replication window in blue
46. 70 IMAGE SCALE DEFAULT FIELD SIZE SMALL EXPOSURE TIME 10 N CYCLES 1 MICRON 160 MODE ENHANCED FIELD SIZE SMALL EXPOSURE TIME 10 N CYCLES 4 15 7 8 MIPS Scan AOR MIPS Scan AORs always use all three arrays of the MIPS instrument The AOR is shown at the end of this section We again use an M31 image simply to illustrate the overlay After selecting the AOR and displaying the image s we select Current AOR from the Overlays menu and enter an acceptable visibility date The area coverage for the MIPS AOR is now displayed in Figure 167 The 24 um overlay appears in blue outline the 70 um in pink and the 160 um overlay in green Clicking on the cross hairs icon within the MIPSC M31 layer brings up the small MIPSC M31 Parts dialog window from which the different arrays can be turned on or off by clicking the corresponding check box The orientation of the scan map will depend on observation date In this example no acceptable date target visible to Spitzer could be found such that a MIPS Scan map could be made along the major axis of M31 e208 rk Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool e Z Teal al tomy Ty a AN Ian Ai aa Selkilao Sid eise AlAlemlgelslslsoe Z emm emm mm T i Pointings Table MIPSC M31 RJ Controls be Hide All Animation Animation w lt Mouse Control 7 kas Shift Left Button Center the Image at point On F
47. 7s 0 005 1 Win I 0o5393 0156 Cl 5h41m49 49s 1d55m17 0s 0 021 2 Win J 05388 0147 Sh41m23 98s 1d45m51 1s 0 007 1 Win 05388 0155 7 5h41m22 82s 1d54m09 0s 0 026 1 M x lS msxBright_85 4 C 5h41m45 26s 1d54m36 7s 0 005 2 M x 4 IRASbrej_85 42 5h41m42 07s 1d56m36 6s 0 007 er M OO x JIRASbrej_85 49 C 5h41m58 01s 1d55m04 8s 0 023 1 MC ix iasbrej 85 36 C 5h41m27 14s 1d57m19 4s 0 011 21 WM C ix IRASbrej_85 33 J 5h41m20 86s 1d57m37 1s 0 027 1 lt gt Help Done Figure 42 The detailed listing of bright objects shown in Figure 41 7 7 18 Show Depth of Coverage Maps on Current Image Depth of Coverage DoC maps allow you to visually see how many frames are being taken in the area covered by your AOR independent of any frame exposure time You must be connected to the Internet to access the SSC servers to use this feature Selecting this overlay opens a dialog window as shown in Figure 43 Enter a date of observation and choose which aperture s you wish to have mapped Click Ok Spot will access the SSC servers to determine the orientation of the map on the chosen observation date and overlay the DoC map Drag the cursor over the map The number of frames at each sky position will appear in the small window in the DoC layer Figure 44 You can change the opacity of the background image or overlay clicking on the E Icon to more clearly see the
48. 95 67 10 87 51 17 144 18 57 88 a 2007 Sep 02 1 53 12 137 81 54 31 94 61 9 81 50 11 143 12 56 82 1 pane Ze Figure 64 The Visibility Orientation dialog that shows the windows when your inertial target is visible June 18 2008 75 Spot User s Guide v18 10 7 Visibility Windows 10 7 1 Visibility Windows for Inertial Targets The visibility windows function in Spot is reached from the Visibility Orientation button in the upper right hand quadrant of the target entry window or from the AOT input dialogs The visibility orientation dialog is shown in Figure 64 If bright moving object avoidance section 10 5 has been selected any periods when a bright moving target will be in the field are deleted from the visibility window The Calculate Visibility Windows for All Targets pull down from the Targets menu allows you to calculate visibility windows for your entire list of targets all at once For both inertial and moving targets you can also save the list of visibility windows to a text file using the Save Target Visibility Windows item in the File Menu The visibility windows dialog for a selected target or target cluster also appear when overlaying AORs on an image see section 7 7 14 10 7 2 Moving Object Visibility Information After entering your NAIF ID or target name into the target entry window select the level of bright object avoidance you would like Spot to include see section 10 5 when calculating the visibility of
49. Cluster targets Background calculation output format modified Visualization Load FITS images from a URL Visualization Load images from NVO Simple Image Access Protocol SIAP sites Visualization Slice Tool now handles image overlay layers Visualization Allow for creation of blank image for overlays Visualization Removed 10 limit on Depth of Coverage overlays for MIPS Scan AORs Visualization Allow for Depth of Coverage overlays for IRAC Post Cryo Mapping AORs Various other improvements and bug fixes 3 Minimum Recommended Hardware Configuration Spot is written in the JAVA language and therefore requires lots of memory and a fast processor in your computer If you run Spot on a system with less memory or processor power than our minimum recommended configuration the software may work but it is likely to be slow and you will probably see window redraw refresh problems While we suggest minimum hardware configurations we recommend that users have more RAM 512 MB or above and a fast processor if you plan on intensive use of the visualization features within Spot The minimum recommended hardware configurations are 3 1 Sun Workstations Sun Ultra 5 with 256 MB RAM If you are not using the visualization features in Spot then it may run acceptably on an Ultra 1 with 256 MB of RAM 3 2 Windows PC 2000 NT XP 512 MB RAM 3 3 Windows PC Vista 1 GB RAM 3 4 Linux PC 256 MB RAM We have done limited t
50. E 762 RESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 1327 1 SLEW TIME 19 0 SETTLE TIME 30 0 SLEW _OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OV DOWNLINK VOLUME 1209568 VERSION S18 0 1 I 192
51. EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO RESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 1365 3536 SLEW_TIME 90 4 SETTLE TIME 86 65362 SLEW _OVERHEAD 215 0 SPE IAL OVERHEAD 0 0 UPLINK VOLUME 1101 DOWNLINK VOLUME 7150906 VERSION S18 0 1 INTEGRATION TIME IRS HI 10 12 582912 IRS DI 19 121 89696 IRS LO 5 121 89696 IRS LO 7 121 89696 IRS LO 14 125 82912 IRS LO 20 125 82912 COMMENT START June 18 2008 184 Spot User s Guide v18 This demonstrates the PCRS peak up selection option COMMENT END AOT TYPE IRS Staring AOR LABEL IRS with peak up for moving single AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET YES TARGET TYPE MOVING SINGLE TARGET NAME Encke EPHEMERIS NAIF ID 1000025 NAIF NAME Encke OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES IS BACKGROUND AOR NO IRS PEAK UP OPTION MODERATE FILTER BLUE RAJ2000 0h58m27 82000s DECJ2000 12d07m31 6000s PM _RA 0 019 PM DEC 0 057 EPOCH 2000 92 FLUX _DENSITY 62 7 EXTENDED SOURCE NO MODE STANDARD HI SHORT EXPOSURE TIME 6 N CYCLES SEQ 1 HI LONG EXPOSURE _TIME 60 N CYCLES SEQ 1 LO SHORTS EXPOSURE _TIME 60 N CYCLES SEQ 1 LO SHORT7 EXPOSURE TIME 60 N CYCLES SEQ 1 LO LONG14 EXPOSURE _TIME 14 N CYCLES SEQ 1 LO LONG21
52. Figure 32 The dialog for overlaying the positions of all known moving objects within a given search radius at a given epoch on an image eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Salle BBW mw Mu e as Es m lslslslee Leen J R Pon AN weve ie d le Mouse Control Left Mouse Button Select a point on the Image Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Z Mouse _Ispy Bn 25 micron ii Ispy CAGE Target m31 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 33 An example of the known moving object overlay In this example the asteroids 1999 XA94 2003 TF13 2003 YF113 and 2007 PR are shown overlaid on the IRIS 25 um plate June 18 2008 39 Spot User s Guide v18 7 7 9 Add Moving Target This option allows you to visualize the tracks of moving targets See section 16 5 for a detailed description of how to use this feature 7 7 10 Image Overlays You can overlay an ISSA 2MASS MSX DSS SkyView NED or a FITS file from disk onto your current image Wavelength or generation DSS options are the same as for normal image display section 15 1 This can also be done using the pulldown menu from the icon in the image and overlay manipulation tool bar 7 7 11 Show All Known Moving Objects at a Date You can obtain a list of all the known moving objects within a given search radius in arcseconds arcminutes or degrees for a given field at a
53. IRS If the estimated duration not including the slew overhead of your AOR is longer than these times the software will return a message telling you to make the observation shorter In general AORs longer than about 3 hours may be more difficult to schedule If your science results in AORs substantially longer than this you can create separate June 18 2008 12 Spot User s Guide v18 shorter duration AORs and use a sequencing constraint section 13 3 so that they are executed serially 6 5 Troubleshooting The current list of known bugs and issues is updated regularly and kept on the Proposal Kit web page from which you downloaded this software If you think you have found a bug before reporting it please check the bugs list and the troubleshooting section of the Release Notes to discover if it is a feature we already know about Also check the appropriate section of this Guide and the Spitzer Observer s Manual to understand what the software is doing If you find a real bug then please do let us know about it 1 Email a description of the problem to the Helpdesk at help spitzer caltech edu 2 Include the hardware configuration you are using e g SunBlade 100 512 MB 3 Please attach the Spot log file created in the default directory when you install the software Each time you run Spot it creates a file called spot DATE TIME log The default directories are Solaris Linux Mac home lt username gt spot
54. June 18 2008 3 Spot User s Guide v18 REO Use Larte Control ICONS deeg 48 7 8 10 Visualization Show Mouse Help shift ctrl M 48 7 8 11 Visualization Show Side Bar on Current Frame shift ctrl B 49 7 8 12 Visualization Show Side Bar on All Frames ctrl B 49 1 9 Window M s Sesanum aspi nak kat heh Saya Saa ven ie 49 TIOS Hep UCI EEN 49 TG lO E 49 GL Tip Ot Elte Dayu uu p aasawa EE AANE 49 7 10 3 AOR File Format Changes nus 49 710 4 AOT Field Descriptions yu y l l ee qu u S Se 50 KEE GE e 50 7 11 Spot v18 Menu Command Summary a k a the Cheetah Sheet 51 B Spot Main Sereenu s u uuu ua dE Ed 54 TEE 54 8 2 Observations MW ndow ege 56 83 Bottoni Bapu 58 9 Entering An Astronomical Observation Request 59 9T Start eu EE 59 9 2 Enter Target IPTorimationn 3 u n L L uu u u Sau 59 9 3 Fill Out an Astronomical Observation Template 59 9 3 1 Unique AOR Label beis debat iert btnem io E EEA ens 59 93 2 Target Buffons sa ssasshansphanphasakanahanaqanakanahasnkanphanakanhphiana anahiaa 59 G SM On E RE 59 9 5 Obtain R source EStImateSu k s aaa ua niin ena geg 60 Hp Other AOT Butfons sa sassassasasasaspaansasqaqaqaanaaahannannanananqaqaqqnanhnaaaianianaa 62 9 6
55. Kit page Please edit this file with care to maintain the correct format so that SPOT can still read it Generated by SPOT on 6 18 2008 00 00 00 HEADER FILE VERSION 17 0 STATUS PROPOSAL MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME A Target Galactic COORD SYSTEM Galactic POSITION RA LON 40 50000000d DEC LAT 31 32000000d OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME Test Target COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA _LON 1h02m03 00000s DEC LAT 4d05m06 0000s PM RA 0 0 PM DEC 0 0 EPOCH 2000 0 OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED CLUSTER POSITIONS TARGET NAME Cluster Pos 2000 COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION1L RA LON 2h03m04 00s DEC _LAT 5d06m07 0s PM RA 3 0 PM DEC 4 0 EPOCH 2000 0 POSITION2 RA LON 2h03m15 00s DEC _LAT 5d04m03 0s PM _RA 5 0 PM DEC 6 0 EPOCH 2000 0 POSITION3 RA LON 2h03m30 00s DEC _LAT 4d50m00 0s PM _RA 7 0 PM DEC 8 0 EPOCH 2000 0 OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME A_Target_2000 COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LO
56. LA Nn Proposal Type Hours in decimal Requested Proprietary Period days bposal Inform Add Principal Ir Clear Add Cont E Clear SSC Internal Add Co Investigators Clear Figure 117 The proposal type can be chosen from the pull down menu Your science proposal will be type GO for Cycle 6 Below this top area in the Main Window are buttons you can click to add information about the Principal Investigator Section 14 2 Technical Contact Co Investigators etc 14 1 1 File Menu This menu handles file I O These menus are similar to other I O menus in Spot 14 1 1 1 Open Proposal This function opens a dialog to select a proposal file to load into the Proposal Submission Tool Spot will look for files with a suffix cs coversheet information 14 1 1 2 Save Proposal This function opens a dialog window to allow you to write out to disk your proposal information Spot will write out the file with the suffix cs 14 1 1 3 Save Proposal As This function opens a dialog that allows you to save the proposal information to a new file name 14 1 1 4 Print Cover Sheet This function brings up a dialog window to select various options for printing the proposal coversheet information general printer information page setup and preferences 14 1 1 5 Print Cover Sheet to File This function allows you to quickly save the proposal coversheet to disk You can save it in HTML Posts
57. Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Exposures Help Cancel OK Figure 77 IRAC Post Cryo Full Array Mapping dialog June 18 2008 88 Spot User s Guide v18 11 1 5 Post Cryo AOT eoe IRAC Post Cryo Mapping Unique AOR Label IRACPC 0000 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Tar Target List Instrument Settings Readout Mode For each Pointing x Field of View Data Collection Full Arra lt y Ei 3 6um E 3 6um Number of Frames 1 High Dynamic Range a i EGE 4 5um 4 Sum Frame Time secs PZM 1 12 Mapping and Dithering BA 100 Mapping Mode 200 i 400 3 No ves Set Mapping Parameters Dither Pattern EE O No Yes Set Dither Parameters Flux Density Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Exposures Help Cancel OK Figure 78 IRAC Post Cryo High Dynamic Range Mapping dialog When the liquid helium cryogen is depleted defining the end of Cycle 5 the two shortest wavelength channels of IRAC at 3 6 and 4 5 um will still be functional and able to acquire science data The SSC has already prepared the AOT that will be used during the Warm Spitzer Extended Mission starting with Cycle 6 The IRAC Post Cryo Mapping AOT for Full Array is shown in Figure 77 The Post Cryo High Dynamic Range AOT is show
58. Order Center Position Center Position on the 5 2 8 7 um slit IRS_Short Lo Module Center Center position in the short lo aperture between the two sub slits June 18 2008 161 IRS_Long Lo_lst Order Let Position Spot User s Guide v18 Shortest A Position on the 19 5 38 0 um slit IRS _Long Lo_ let order 2nd Position Longest A Position on the 19 5 38 0 um slit IRS_Long Lo_lst Order Center Position Center Position on the 19 5 38 0 um slit IRS _Long Lo 2nd Order Let Position Shortest A Position on the 14 0 21 3 um slit IRS _Long Lo 2nd Order 2nd Position Longest Position on the 14 0 21 3 um slit IRS_Long Lo_2nd Order Center Position Center Position on the 14 0 21 3 um slit IRS_Long Lo Module Center Center position in long lo aperture between the two sub slits IRS Short Hi_lst_Position Shortest A Position IRS Short Hi_2nd Position Longest Position IRS_Short Hi_ Center Position Center Position IRS _Long Hi_lst_ Position Shortest Position IRS _Long Hi_2nd Position Longest Position IRS_Long Hi_Center_ Position PCRS LA Center of 1A PCRS Detector PCRS_1_B Center of 1B PCRS Detector PCRS ZA Center of 2A PCRS Detector PCRS ZB Center of 2B PCRS Detector Center of of the IRAC_ Center of 3 6 amp 5 8umArray IRAC_ Center of 3 6umArray Center Array FOV IRAC_ Center of 3 6umSub array Center of array FOV IRAC_Center_of 5 8umArray Center
59. Position 2 TDista Shift Left Button Center the Mouse Dist Tool gt ele Lon 22h01m03 95270s Lon 21h57m36 22401s 3 704 61 5 Lat 10d42m53 8657s Lat 11d17m44 0805s TT a eee gissa zm ee p sj Cp gt SA Help Done Distance ZS o S fem eo o m Observations A 25 micron Encke Target Encke Type Moving Single mean Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 176 The Distance Tool in action The blue arc indicates the distance between the two selected points The distance in arcseconds is displayed on the image Detailed information can be brought up in the Distance dialog box June 18 2008 169 Spot User s Guide v18 Note that estimating the distance between two moving targets using this tool is only valid between points on the two trajectories that correspond to the same date We have exact date point matching for two moving bodies in Spot With this hand drawn tool it is possible to estimate separation distances to an accuracy of a fraction of an arcsecond when compared with the calculated ephemeris positions However if your observation crucially depends on separation estimates to higher accuracy we strongly recommend that you calculate these separations using JPL s Horizons software For instructions on how to use Horizons to assist with Spitzer observation planning please see the
60. Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Target Target List Select Resources Spectral Coverage f Multi Matching Resources D ETH N The MAST Image Scrapbook Matching ImageskyView Virtual Observatory The ALADIN image server L Tgt Name MAST Scrapboo MAST Scrapboo MAST Scrapboo MAST Scrapboo MAST Scrapboo MAST Scrapboo Oh42 0h42m41 49s 0h42m41 62s 0h42m41 74s Initial Zoom Level CADC HST Image Search ADC Image Search ohazmDigitized Sky Survey 0h42m40 85s E Ola 41d15m51 2s 41d17m05 2s 41d15m18 4s 41d15m57 9s_ 7 jaje No Zoom _ p Three Color Plots Were Put plot in new Frame Make this a 3 Color Plot O Put plot in current Frame Color Band Red PA Help Cancel OK Figure 21 The available list of NVO image resources for the given spectral coverage that you have selected as shown in Figure 20 You can enter the initial zoom level You can also create three color RGB image composites Click OK to complete the image search Local FITS Image Look In E irac SCH GC DI o Sr SPITZER_I1_5504000_0_4_E224586_msaic fits SPITZER_I2_5504000_0_4_E225198_msaic fits SPITZER_I3_5504000_0_4_E225204_msaic fits 3 SPITZER_I4_5504000_0_4_E225199_msaic fits Initial Zoom Level No Zoom
61. Single Total Duration hrs 6 1 Figure 161 The overlay of an IRS Staring AOR on the ISSA 25 um image and the 2MASS K band image This shows the peak up images as well as the spectral exposures Below are the details of the IRS Staring AOR shown in Figure 161 AOT TYPE IRS Staring AOR LABEL IRSS 0000 AOR STATUS New MOVING TARGET NO p TARGET_TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET_NAME m31 COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 0h42m44 32s DEC LAT 41d16m08 5s OBJECT AVOIDANCE FARTH YES OTHERS YES IRS Pl DEC OFFESI _UP OPTION MODERATE FILTER BLUE RA OFFSET 0 0 T 0 0 FLUX _DENSITY 150 0 EXTENDED SOURCE YES MODE STANDAR HI SHORT EXPOSURE TIME 6 N CYCLES SEQ 1 HI LONG EXPOSURE 1O 1 TIME 60 N CYCLES SE 15 7 4 Overlaying Multiple AORs You can overlay multiple AORs on an image at one time See section 7 7 14 and Figure 37 Selecting to overlay more than just the current AOR brings up the dialog shown in Figure 162 which asks if the same observation date within a visibility window can be applied to each of the AORs to be overlaid If we select to overlay both the example IRAC mapping and IRS Staring AORs shown above individually in sections 15 7 2 and June 18 2008 153 Spot User s Guide v18 15 7 3 respectiv
62. Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z Salzen Aon j 4 D dese ale Me BS BUR ETEA S 208 D Observations Astronomical Observation Requests AORs Label Target Position Type T G F Instrument Stat Duration On P m31 IRAC map m31 0h42m44 Fixed Single mi C IRAC Mapping new 3109 v m31 IRS Staring m31 0h42m44 Fixed Single I Ed FIRS Staring new 997 v Figure 103 When a timing constraint has been added to an AOR the T flag will be turned on in the main AOR table You may also access the Timing Window from the Group Follow on Constraints dialog by clicking the Add Timing button Grouping and Follow on constraints are discussed in the next section 13 3 Grouping Follow on Constraints 13 3 1 Description You may create 3 types of grouping constraints Sequence Chain and Group Within June 18 2008 112 Spot User s Guide v18 Chain ordered non interruptible group The AORs will be executed in the order specified with NO interruptions in the chain If you chain together AORs you must ensure that the chain does not exceed the maximum allowable duration for a single AOR 3 hours MIPS 8 hours for IRAC and IRS Spot will warn you if your chain is too long It will show you the total time in the chain in the Constraints window Group Within A group of AORs executed within a specific length of time but with no particular starting date time constraint Once the first AOR has been executed the rest of th
63. The AOR will start within the given timing window You also use this dialog to create ABSOLUTE TIME BEFORE or AFTER constraints For absolute time observations enter the same date and time for both the start and end fields For a BEFORE constraint enter the nominal Spitzer launch date for the start date time and the date time before which the observations should be done as the end time For an AFTER constraint enter the first date time the observation should be done as the start time and some distant date in the future for the end time Some examples are shown in Table 2 Start_ Date Start Time End Date End_ Time Absolute Time 2007 Dec 6 14 12 35 2007 Dec 6 14 12 35 Before Aug 1 2008 2005 Aug 23 00 00 00 2008 Aug 1 00 00 00 After June 3 2008 2008 Jun 3 00 00 00 2010 Dec 31 00 00 00 Table 2 Examples of Timing constraints that can be specified in the timing window When specifying an ABSOLUTE TIME constraint for fixed targets the AOR will start executing within a few seconds of the specified time This does not mean that the first exposure will start at this time but the main AOR commanding will begin executing For moving targets the tracking will start within 3 seconds of the specified time When you have finished entering constraints if you click OK or Apply the T flag will be turned on in the main AOR table for this AOR This is shown in Figure 103 Clicking OK closes the Timing Window while clicking Apply leaves it open OO
64. The pulldown menu within the dialog allows you to select either a circle or rectangle to define the aperture June 18 2008 140 Spot User s Guide v18 8 Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Toon Z Tel ze aw w aw Selo gd Yt a gs gg Ze Flux 2 525 MJY SR Eq J2000 RA 0h34m48 26s X 163 500 1 Pixel 90 000 Eq J2000 Dec 39d50m39 1s Y 46 000 Mouse Control Left Mouse Button click and drag an area to crop Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Crop Plot t eee ee K issa 25 micron m31 Base Image E EE E Observations My ISSA 25 micron m31 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 6 1 Figure 146 Once the Crop utility under the Overlays menu also the Crop icon in the image manipulation and overlays tool bar along the left side has been selected drag the cursor across the image while holding the left mouse button as shown in the figure The Use Large Control Icons option has been set in this example see also Figure 147 eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool 4 am el D gd els Aa nje EB a w Wl gt S le Mouse Control oer z lt Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Any 131 ZE e098 8 Crop ISSA 25 micron m31 dda e ise Ge eeeEgae l D Observat
65. Trajectory In the cluster of mini icons associated with your object name in the side bar is the list icon DI this is the rightmost mini icon in the Encke box shown in Figure 173 Clicking on this icon will display a list of dates and positions for your moving target Figure 174 In this display Hide All Points will remove the point markings from the trajectory once Hide All Points has been clicked it will be replaced with Show All Points so this button acts as a toggle The first column of the table allows you to select which points to display by toggling the check mark on or off The Hide Path toggle button will remove the trajectory but leave the points if desired The second column marked Hi allows you to selectively highlight points and dates see below The current selected point is highlighted in one color and previously highlighted points are given a different color The third column allows you to change the shape of the plotted points The Show All Dates Hide All Dates toggle button will label each of the points on your trajectory with the date A subset of the dates can be displayed by toggling the check mark under the Show Date column The RA Dec positions for the selected dates are shown in the table However RA Dec and underlying flux at any point on the image and the trajectory can be determined by moving the cursor over the image and reading the position from the table just under the menu
66. User s Guide v18 This does nothing to the target information in the AORs in the AOR table It only clears the target list in Spot s memory 7 2 7 Enable All AORs ctrl E This function turns the flag ON for all AORs currently in Spot This function is most likely to be used if you are planning to write out a subset of your AORs to a file or are recalculating resource estimates for a subset 7 2 8 Disable All AORs without G F Constraints ctrl D This turns the flag OFF for all AORs that are not part of a Grouping or Follow on constraint see section 13 3 7 2 9 Toggle ON Flag AORs without G F Constraints ctrl W For all AORs that are not part of a Grouping or Follow on constraint see section 13 3 this turns the flag from OFF to ON or ON to OFF Once you have added Group Follow on constraints Spot won t let you turn theseAORs OFF This prevents you from saving a set of AORs and their associated constraints with missing AORs because you unintentionally turned one or more of the AORs OFF All the AORs within each constraint must be in the AOR file otherwise the constraint is not valid 7 3 Targets Menu The functions in the Targets menu are the following Please refer to section 10 7 3 1 New Target ctrl T Enter a new target from the target entry window 7 3 2 Delete Selected Targets Delete the currently selected targets The name of the current target is displayed at the bottom of the main screen 7 3 3 M
67. and the epoch for the 1950 coordinates The epoch field has a default value of 1950 0 The epoch will be used to properly transform the B1950 coordinates to J2000 however see the note in section 10 2 2 Galactic Enter the galactic longitude and latitude No proper motion or epoch entries are allowed June 18 2008 68 Spot User s Guide v18 Ecliptic J2000 Enter the ecliptic longitude and latitude No proper motion or epoch entries are allowed Ecliptic B1950 Enter the ecliptic longitude and latitude and the epoch The epoch field has a default value of 2000 0 ee Target Target Name required SIMBAD 2 Resolve To Naif ID Visibility Orientation Background Fixed Single Fixed Cluster Fixed Cluster Positions Moving Single Moving Cluster Standard Ephemeris User Defined Ephemeris NAIF ID Get Target Name Numbe Offset East Row Perpendicular Offset North Column Parallel 9 2 S 0 4 a 5 Y Offset Coordinates fei Celestial E N Array Row Perp Col Para Observe the offsets only Bright Moving Objects to Avoid V Earth Moon E Others Help Cancel OK Figure 59 The moving cluster target entry dialog You may enter inertial coordinates in a variety of formats Equatorial RA 12 5 10 12 05 10 12510 12h5m10s 12 5 12 5 hours of RA 12h30m00s 12 5d 12 5 Equatorial Dec 12 5 10 12 05 10 June 18 2008 69 Spot User s Guid
68. as the Show Current Resource Estimates function that is available from the Tools menu section 7 5 6 It does not recalculate the time estimates The image manipulation and overlay icons will appear on the left hand side of Spot whenever you display images Figure 49 Click on the icons to activate them The ER magnifying glass icons are all for zooming your images in or out This icon zooms in the current image and this one zooms out These i icons s and a apply the zoom to all the images stacked in the active frame if you have only one image per frame the ALL buttons will not be active The crosshair icon centers the current target in the middle of the current image frame Mouse Cont Mouse Ar 0009 Seeegegae rz Figure 49 The image manipulation and overlay icons will appear along the left side of Spot whenever images are displayed In addition a number of overlay options are now available from this tool bar This icon Bu will ala the current fixed SES poston on an iage This icon will draw a points on the image This icon a B will compute statistics in either a circular or rectangular area on the image This icon will crop the image This icon e will allow you to determine the distance between two points on an image You can add marks on an image and create your own catalog by clicking on this icon e Finally this icon June 18 2008 55 Spot User s Guide
69. depth of coverage map Click the color table icon to select a different color table for the DoC map Depth of Coverage maps do not work well near the poles Our method of creating the depth of coverage maps creates misleading or incorrect results when the declination is greater than about 88 More specifically the method breaks down the errors become noticeable when the requested range of right ascension is greater than 10 Spot will return an error message if it detects that the user is requesting a depth of coverage map too near the poles June 18 2008 45 Spot User s Guide v18 Select Observation Date AOR Depth Of Coverage Map Select Observation Date and Map to Display 2007 Jan 06 18 08 00 2007 Aug 07 11 29 00 2008 Jan 14 20 03 00 2008 Aug 14 14 37 00 2009 Jan 21 23 48 00 2007 Feb 21 19 38 00 2007 Sep 24 05 17 00 2008 Feb 29 21 51 00 2008 Oct 01 08 33 00 2009 Mar 09 01 44 00 2009 Aug 22 18 44 00 2009 Sep 29 23 54 00 Select Observation Date AOR Map Types Time 00 00 00 l IRS Red Peakup Help Cancel OK Figure 43 Dialog window for a depth of coverage map of a MIPS observation of M31 The AOR Map Types shown in the lower right of the dialog will change depending on which apertures or modules are selected in your AOR eo Spot Spitzer Planni
70. has been executed This is special case of a follow on constraint for moving targets 13 3 2 Caveats for Grouping Constraints We have built several checks into Spot to prevent the creation of grouping constraints that are impossible to schedule If you have questions about constraints please see the Spitzer Observer s Manual and Spitzer Observing Rules documents for more information If you are still in doubt send a message to the Helpdesk help spitzer caltech edu Three guidelines for groups that are not allowed are 1 Spitzer operates only one instrument at a time and it takes a finite amount of time to switch from one instrument to another Spot will prevent you from chaining AORs from different instruments 2 The maximum allowable duration for a non interruptible group chain of AORs is 3 hours for MIPS and 8 hours for IRS and IRAC Spot will show you the total duration in your chained AORs Be sure you have calculated a time estimate for all the AORs in the chain 3 If you create a Group Within constraint check that the sum of the AOR durations in the constraint does not exceed the time period specified in the constraint Spot will warn you if it does 13 3 3 Creating New Grouping and Follow on Constraints To create a new constraint select Group Follow on Constraints from the Tools menu This opens the Constraint Editor Tool dialog shown in Figure 104 To add a new grouping constraint you click on the Add Sequencing Ad
71. html MIPS http ssc spitzer caltech edu mips sens html 9 6 3 Comments This is a text field where you may enter any additional information that you wish to save with your AOR The maximum length of a comment is 500 lines In general the Science User Support staff at the SSC will only read the comment field if there is a problem with your AOR All the information necessary to execute the AOR should be included in the AOR and constraint parameters Do not expect the SSC staff to know how to schedule your AOR solely on the contents of the comments field NOTE If you try to paste in a very large comment 3000 lines and you are using a Windows based PC system Spot may crash This is a JAVA problem on Windows 9 6 4 Special Required special features of your AOR can be documented by clicking this button see section 9 4 9 6 5 Vis Window Calculating the visibility windows for your AOR i e the time periods during which Spitzer can observe the object is discussed in section 10 7 If you click this button Spot June 18 2008 62 Spot User s Guide v18 will calculate the visibility windows including the AOT parameters you have entered instead of just using the target position 9 7 Save AORs Save the AORs you have created from the File menu function or by clicking on the diskette icon in the icon bar or at the bottom of the main screen AOR files are saved with the suffix aor If you do not select a specific dir
72. if anything seems out of the ordinary 14 12 2 Submitting the Proposal Start Spot and ensure the Net Up symbol is present Open the Proposal Submission Tool and read in the appropriate coversheet file Check that the correct Hours Requested or Dollars Requested is indicated and that the scientific justification file indicated is the correct one Read in the appropriate AOR file into the Spot AOR window Archive and Theory proposals excepted June 18 2008 130 Spot User s Guide v18 Confirm AORs z Are the AORs currently in the AOR window the correct ones to include with this proposal z Figure 134 Spot will ask you if the AORs you have loaded into Spot are the ones you want to submit with your proposal eoe Save proposal information Save As soifer_m31 proposals H Name Date Modified Please save the changes to continue proposal submission or update Cancelling the save will cancel submission update File Format Spitzer Proposal Covershee New Folder Cancel Save Figure 135 Spot will force you to save your coversheet file during the actual submission process Spot will add the Proposal User Name to the cs file when it saves it at this step If you wish to update your Proposal after submitting it load this cs file into Spot make any necessary changes to your proposal and submit it to the SSC On the Proposal Submission Tool top too
73. images but AOR overlays will appear the way they will be observed regardless of coordinate system 7 6 4 DSS Digitized Sky Survey The optical Palomar Sky Survey images are provided here They are served from the Space Telescope Science Institute http archive stsci edu cgi_bin dss_form The image selection dialog is shown in Figure 15 Choices in target image size image location zoom and three color composites analogous to those for the ISSA images are available If you require an image larger than 30 on a side please get it directly from the DSS web page and then load it as a local FITS file section 7 6 9 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31000s 41d16m09 4000s Hew Target Modify Target Target List Survey Types POSS2 UKSTU Red D POSS2 UKSTU Infrared POSS2 UKSTU Blue Where D POSS1 Red e Put plot in new Frame POSS1 Blue Put plot in current Frame Quick Survey HST Phase 2 Target Positioning GSC 2 HST Phase 1 Target Positioning GSC 1 The best of a combined list of all plates Width Degrees 0 25 Height Degrees w 0 25 Initial Zoom Level Me Zoom v Three Color Plots C Make this a 3 Color Plot Color Band Red w Figure 15 The Digital Sky Survey image selection dialog is shown You enter the size 57 6 1800 0 96 30 or 0 016 0 5 on a side and the initial zoom level You can also create three color RG
74. not using a peak up 11 2 3 Peak up Only The Peak up Only mode of IRS observing is designed to permit the user to test the feasibility of using a particular source as a peak up target for future IRS observations In instances where 1 The available peak up targets have a complex morphology 2 The background is highly variable on small spatial scales and 3 There is no nearby point source suitable for an offset peak up it may be prudent to determine whether the onboard peak up algorithm can successfully centroid on the target before investing large amounts of spectroscopic integration time on the scientific target s of interest This mode is only available for IRS peak up and just one peak up only observation will be made per AOR regardless of whether you enter a single or cluster target To select this mode simply fill out the IRS peak up section of the AOT where the peak up filter and accuracy are chosen and then select Peak up Only tab in the instrument section The on board IRS peak up software will run to completion but no offset will be made to place a science target on one of the IRS slits Note The IRS Peak up Imaging AOT section 11 5 should be used to perform more sophisticated observations of targets rather than this peak up only mode within the IRS Staring AOT 11 2 4 Peak up Target Flux Limits Please see the Spitzer Observer s Manual for details about how you should select peak up targets for IRS Peak up We repea
75. of Cycles Flux Density Cale Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis window Figure 101 The MIPS Total Power Mode AO T June 18 2008 108 Spot User s Guide v18 12 Tools for Replicating AORs 12 1 AOR Replication Tool The AOR Replication Tool allows Spot to automatically create a number of AORs by merging a template AOR and a list of targets For every target in your selected group an AOR with the template parameters will be created To use the AOR Replication Tool 1 First create the template AOR Click on this AOR in the AOR table to make it the current AOR It will be highlighted to show that it is selected All the AORs created with the AOR Replication Tool will have the AOT parameters specified in this AOR 2 Select the AOR Replication Tool from the Tools menu 3 Select the targets you wish to have merged with this template You may do this in one of three ways Open the current Target List from the Targets menu the Target List icon or the Target List button in the AOR Replication Tool Dialog You may then drag and drop targets from the target list into the AOR Replication Tool window From the AOR Replication Tool window you can select all of the targets in the Target List with the Get All Targets button From the AOR Replication Tool window you can select the current target in the Target List with the Get Current button
76. of this AOR This is always new for AORs you have just created If you are modifying AORs that have been checked out of our database this field will represent the appropriate status ON flag Tables formatted in the JAVA language have several features that can be exploited while using Spot Clicking on and dragging the column headers can rearrange the columns Simply clicking on a column header enables sorting of the table by the column contents When the header is clicked upon once or twice red or blue arrows appear next to the column header The red arrow 1 signifies sorting in increasing order and the blue arrow 1 indicates sorting in decreasing order A third click or no arrow means that the list is returned to its original order You may edit an AOR by double clicking on it or delete an AOR by selecting it and clicking on the Delete Current AOR button By clicking and dragging on the edge of the header cell you can change the width of the column eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z I Al Fa i _ eq Bi GI Lj sa BS B BB 2 2 ee D Observations Astronomical Observation Requests AORs Label Target Position Type T G Duration Instrument On IRAC 0000 m31 0h42m44 31 Fixed Single yi 3109 t Bahar j IRSI 0000 m31 0h42m44 31 Fixed Single Ce pen Ne EN iRss o00o m31 0h42m44 31 Fixed Single SIS aam MIPSP 0000 m31 0h42m44 31 Fixed Single HH ze been MIPST 0000 m31 0h42m44 31 Fixed Single E type vT
77. shadow constraint also includes a comment field for you to include additional information This is primarily for your own records but MAY be accessed by the SSC if extra information is required to clarify your scheduling needs 10 4 Target Name Resolution Name resolution of fixed targets in the NASA IPAC Extragalactic Database NED and the SIMBAD Astronomical Database is available Moving target name resolution is also available from a list that the SSC generates from HORIZONS DASTCOM database After entering the target name click on the Resolve the Name button on the target entry dialog If the target is found in the selected database Spot will enter the coordinates fixed target or NAIF Identification number moving target automatically into the dialog 10 5 Bright Moving Object Avoidance Bright inertial objects can be avoided when planning observations using the Spitzer Bright Objects for AOR overlay described in Section 7 7 17 However it is much harder to anticipate the presence of bright solar system objects in your target field on a given date Consequently Spot provides a feature that calculates visibility windows for your object that automatically designates your target as not visible if it is close to a bright moving object at that time This feature is implemented at the bottom of the target entry dialog There are two checkboxes that allow you to 1 Avoid Earth and Moon 2 Avoid Others This option avoids a list o
78. the AOR visualization as rectangles with an X in them The peak up is not shown if a peak up is not selected The PCRS peak up is not visualized if selected Note that peak ups are only performed on the peak up target not on each target within a cluster target type IRS Staring observations perform 2 dithers per aperture going from 1 3 of the way in from the edge of the slit to 2 3 of the length of the slit These dithers appear in the visualizations 15 7 1 3 Features in MIPS Visualizations The 70 um array as viewed on the sky represents the missing side B Missing sections from the 70 and 160 um arrays are also represented The dither positions for MIPS Photometry Super resolution were optimized for performance after launch A description of all available dithers can be found in the MIPS chapter of the Spitzer Observer s Manual MIPS SED mode performs two dithers in the slit similar to the IRS Staring mode The MIPS Total Power mode visualization resembles the Photometry Super resolution mode additionally the option exists to show or hide parallel data obtained in this mode Using the images in the figures from the above sections we provide several examples of overlaying an AOR here 15 7 2 IRAC Mapping AOR The sample IRAC mapping AOR uses full array mode both FOVs turned on a 5 position Gaussian dither and a 3x3 map with 260 row and column steps with no map center offsets The AOR file is shown at the end of this sec
79. the position angle for the Spitzer focal plane on the date you want to observe your target You can then enter June 18 2008 170 Spot User s Guide v18 that position angle into the box in the Spitzer layer control to re orient the focal plane display In the example in the figure a position angle of 35 has been entered The focal plane configuration icon E in the Spitzer layer allows you to toggle apertures on and off and change the color of the displayed apertures See the Spitzer Observer s Manual for a full description of the apertures on the focal plane The arrow pointing to the Sun symbol in the focal plane display denotes the Spitzer Sun direction as projected on the sky eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z Sale DDD em ele u us mm ew z oe R Mouse Control Left Mouse Button Move Focal Plane e Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Spitzer Focal zs a eoe ISSA 25 micron Encke a ZZ ZS k Target Encke Type Moving Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 178 The Spitzer diffraction spikes can be toggled off and on when displaying the focal plane and can be translationally repositioned to for example indicate the direction of diffraction spikes from a nearby bright object on a date you plan to observe 16 3 5 Displaying the Spitzer Diffractio
80. two high resolution slits and performs a peak up at the source position The AOR file is shown at the end of this section We again use the M31 images simply to illustrate the overlay After selecting the AOR and displaying the images we select Current AOR from the Overlays menu and follow the same procedure described in the previous section for the IRAC mapping AOR overlay The area coverage for the IRS AOR is now displayed in Figure 161 The area covered by the AOR is shown on both the 5 ISSA image where it is nearly invisible unless zooming in and the 250 2MASS image The overlay looks somewhat confusing on the images because it displays the peak up exposures as well as the spectroscopy exposures To see just the peak up or just the spectra overlays you can manipulate what is displayed by clicking the table icon in the image side bar and turning on or off the different FOVs The animation feature is also useful here in showing how the observations are taken Note that the Peak up arrays appear as X filled rectangles in the overlay when the IRS slits are on source June 18 2008 152 Spot User s Guide v18 ke H 8 BEE Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z SA zz Jolas Se i EEEE EE HOUOS MARAE ASO Mouse Control _ Uddin A x S micro 131 a m31 i S j S Geelen a Observations H sssa 25 micron m31 P mass k m31 Target m31 Type Fixed
81. up the positions or offsets should be set to zero Unique AOR Label RSS 0000 Target Geminga Type Fixed Single Position 6n33m54 15000s 17 d46m12 9000s Hew Target Modify Targ Target List Peak Up Settings Choose one Peak Up mode IRS Peak Up PCRS Peak Up No Peak Up Peakup Target Accuracy Moderate E Specifications Offset Type e Offset A RAC 0 000 Peak up Bands Blue 13 3 18 7 um e C Extended Source A Dec y 0 000 Position 2MASS selection Pux Rensi Instrument Settings You may select one mode Standard or Peak Up Only Standard Peakup Only IRS Slit Hi Res 9 9 19 6 um Hi Res 18 7 37 2 um Low Res 5 2 8 7 um Low Res 7 4 14 5 um Ramp Duration of Cycles IS Visi lt lt IE Low Res 14 0 21 3 um Low Res 19 6 38 0 um lt Flux Density Cale Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Figure 80 IRS Staring Mode AOT also showing the IRS Peak Up settings 11 2 2 2 2MASS Catalog Peak Up Targets You can use the 2MASS selection tool activated by pressing the button shown in Figure 80 to perform a search of the full 2MASS catalog for use in IRS peak up The tool extrapolates 2MASS JHK photometry using stellar photo
82. what is shown in Figure 68 ee Background Estimates Background Estimates at 24 00 microns EES SE Date Zodiacal Light MJy Interstellar Medium Cosmic Infrared Bac Total Background 2008 Sep 07 11 36 30 20 986 1 436 0 000 22 422 Done 2009 Jan 21 23 51 00 19 903 1 436 0 000 21 338 paunan 2009 Mar 09 01 48 00 27 109 1 436 0 000 28 545 2009 Feb 14 00 49 30 23 066 1 436 0 000 24 502 2009 Aug 22 18 49 00 24 644 1 436 0 000 26 080 2009 Sep 29 23 54 00 19 053 1 436 0 000 20 489 A 2009 Sep 10 21 21 30 21 483 1 436 0 000 22 919 Y Figure 68 Backeround Estimates obtained over the range of dates when a target is visible You can also estimate the backgrounds for a specific date see Figure 67 10 9 3 Batch Mode Background Estimates Spot will also return background estimates for a list of targets Enter your targets into Spot and then open the target list dialog Select the Calculate Background for All Targets option from the Targets pull down menu and the dialog shown in Figure 69 will appear You can further select your preference for the date for which the background will be calculated either the range of dates when the targets are visible or for a specific date To perform the calculation press the Do Estimate button To show the backgrounds for the list of targets press the Show Background button in the List of Targets dialog see Figure 63 You can also save the backgrounds to a text file using the Save Target Backgrou
83. wish to include a scientific justification file and or AOR file with the update Click on the check box next to any item you want to update Figure 139 Spot will confirm that the update was successful Figure 140 and a receipt of the update will be emailed to the submitter s email address 14 13 Submitting a Spitzer Observing Proposal Review These are the steps you need to take to submit a Spitzer observing proposal 1 Think of some spiffy science you can do with Spitzer 2 Obtain all the relevant documentation about Spitzer and its science instruments on the Spitzer Science Center website at http ssc spitzer caltech edu These include the Science Observing Rules Observer s Manual Call for Proposals Spot User s Guide and the Reserved Observations Catalog ROC among others 3 Download and install Spot Do this early Get to know Spot and the Spitzer science instruments well ahead of the proposal submission deadline 4 If you have any problems installing or using Spot or any questions regarding Spitzer or its instruments contact us at the Spitzer Helpdesk help spitzer caltech edu 5 Check the ROC Avoid observations already reserved by other Spitzer observers You can now easily do this using the search tools within Leopard See the Leopard User Guide Consult the Observing Rules for allowed duplications 6 View programs from previous Cycles in Spot where others have done similar science to what you propose to do
84. your target Then click on the Visibility Orientation button in the upper right hand quadrant of the target entry window If Spot has access to the ephemeris corresponding to the NAIF ID of your object it will now calculate the periods during which your object is visible to Spitzer If bright object avoidance is selected Spot will modify the visibility windows to avoid times when a bright object is near your target object The visibility orientation dialog is shown in Figure 65 You can also determine the visibility windows for shadow observations for your moving target see section 10 3 3 by pressing the Calculate Shadow Visibility button in the dialog If your object does not have a NAIF ID and you are entering orbital elements for a user defined ephemeris please see section 10 3 2 for more information on how to get an ephemeris for visibility calculations 10 7 3 Spitzer Planning with Horizons For planning moving target observations Spot will return visibility windows for your target and provide time estimates for execution of your AORs However it does not have the capability to provide more specific geometric information required for planning some Solar System observations To further assist planning your Spitzer observations with Spot the JPL Solar System Dynamics group has kindly incorporated the Spitzer orbit file into the publicly available JPL Horizons software http ssd jpl nasa gov horizons Spitzer can be requested as an
85. 0 0 83 8 33 or 0 014 0 139 on a side and the initial zoom level You can also create three color RGB image composites The displayed ISSA IRIS image may not be the full size requested The images are stored and returned as plates with a limited overlap The ISSA IRIS server picks the best plate by maximizing the distance from the target to the nearest edge of the plate This edge June 18 2008 25 Spot User s Guide v18 may still be close enough to the target that the displayed image will appear to have one side shaved off or the target may not be centered in the image but off to one side If you already have existing images displayed you may also select to have the new ones stacked into that frame If you utilize this feature you must remember that the plate scales for the images from the different servers are very different For instance ISSA IRIS images are 1 12 5 on a side while 2MASS images are 50 500 on a side 7 6 2 2MASS Two Micron All Sky Survey The 2MASS images are also served from IRSA You can select J H and or K band At this time large area mosaics of the images are not available only single Atlas Images will be retrieved in the region specified Even though these are full fidelity images they should not be used directly for photometry Use the 2MASS catalogs for detailed source information The image selection dialog is shown in Figure 13 Choices in target image siz
86. 0 0 UPLINK _VOLUME 1589 DOWNLINK VOLUME 21278902 VERSION S18 0 1 INTEGRATION TIME MIPS 24 48 234497 MIPS 70 83 88608 MIPS 160 83 88608 June 18 2008 186 EPOCH 1950 0 ECT AVOIDANCE 10 N CYCLI MICRON70 MA AOT TYPE AOR LABEL AOR STATUS MOVING TARGET TARGET TYP TARGET NAME COORD SYSTEM new NO POSITION GI MICRON 70 BOY Ka MAP CYCLES 1 MICRON 160 MODE DEFAULT N CYCLES 4 MICRON160 MAP MAP CYCLES 1 PECIAL IMPACT ESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 10573 ETTLE TIME 398 01562 SLEW Li Com Uy Z ROWS 3 IMAGI S ROWS 3 ROWS 3 MICRON 24 FIELD SIZE MICRON24 MAP MIPS Photometry MIPS PH SR raster FIXED SINGLI A_Target_Ecliptic_1950 Ecliptic B1950 RA_LON 17 20000000d EARTH Y URE TIME 3 1 COL _STEP A ELD SIZE SMALL EXPOSURE COLS 3 E SCALE Kal Spot User s Guide v18 EC_LAT 35 60000000d YES N CYCLES 1 1 N MAP CYCLES 1 E TI 1 COLS 3 EP 1 2 COL STEP 1 2 SMALL EXPOSURE TIME 10 none LATE COLS 3 SLEW TIME 261 0 EAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 PLINK VOLUME 7781 DOWNLINK VOL EGRATION TIME EP 1 2 COL STEP 1 2 NO SECOND LO
87. 0 45 6 2007 Aug 07 21 50 00 2007 Sep 24 04 25 00 47 3 2008 Jan 14 20 01 00 2008 Feb 29 10 57 00 45 6 2008 Aug 15 00 53 00 2008 Oct 01 07 35 00 47 3 2009 Jan 21 23 40 00 2009 Mar 08 14 45 00 45 6 2009 Aug 23 04 55 00 2009 Sep 29 23 03 00 37 8 Help Cancel OK Figure 102 The Timing Windows dialog allows entry of multiple timing constraints for an AOR Spot checks the visibility of the observation before you can set any timing constraints 13 2 Timing Constraints To enter a timing constraint select an AOR from the AOR table and then select Timing Constraints from the Tools menu The dialog shown in Figure 102 will appear Spot will connect to the SSC servers and obtain the visibility information for the observation prior to you being able to set any Timing Constraints If you are not connected to the Internet Spot will warn you about this but will still allow you to add timing constraints to your AORs Check the visibility windows for your observations and then enter the start and end dates times that define the window s when your observation should be made Spot will not let you set timing constraints that are completely outside a visibility window if June 18 2008 111 Spot User s Guide v18 connected to Internet If you set timing constraints offline be sure to check that the timing constraints fit within a visibility window before you submit such AORs to the SSC All times should be entered as Universal Time UT
88. 08 18 Spot User s Guide v18 7 1 10 Search Programs Selecting Search Programs will bring up a dialog such as the one shown in Figure 8 For any target in your list of targets Spot will contact the databases at the SSC and search for all AORs from approved programs with target positions within the user specified search radius Units for the search radius can be in arcseconds arcminutes or degrees specified using the pulldown in the dialog The minimum search radius is 1 For moving targets Spot will search for all AORs corresponding to the target s NAIF ID You can also select the AOT s and wavelength s you wish returned from the search In effect it is now possible within Spot to search the Spitzer Reserved Observations Catalog see http ssc spitzer caltech edu roc although we strongly recommend that you use Leopard for this purpose instead You must be connected to the Internet to search programs This works for both inertial and moving targets The results of the example search are shown in Figure 9 The AORs appear in the main Observations window The target information corresponding to the AORs returned by the search are inserted into the current list of targets d ee Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool wis Sigi BM a es ie az s 2v mo Astronomical Observation rests AORs _ Label Target Position Type te Instrument Duration Stat On D P00159 IRAC 51 NGC5194
89. 091 0 118 0 249 0 616 June 18 2008 36 Spot User s Guide v18 F23570 2846 359 8954 29 0547 0 224 0 130 0 146 0 465 F23554 2822 359 5090 28 6531 0 202 0 149 0 310 2 078 F2355542735 359 5287 27 8722 0 098 0 170 0 234 0 840 Note IRSA has developed a tool that will help you transform a regular ASCII table into IPAC table format See http irsa ipac caltech edu applications TblReformat 7 7 1 8 Overlay PCRS Catalog Spot can overlay onto images the Spitzer Point Calibration and Reference Sensor PCRS source catalog The selection dialog is shown in Figure 30 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31000s 41d16m09 4000s Hew Target Modify Target Target List Where e Overlay catalog in current frame O Overlay catalog in all frames Radius Degrees w 2 50000 Figure 30 This dialog will allow you to select the Spitzer PCRS source catalog to overlay onto your images 7 7 2 Crop This is not so much an overlay as a means to crop the size of an image displayed in the Image window Crop creates a cropped copy of the image while maintaining the original image See section 15 1 6 Clicking on the icon in the image and overlay manipulation tool bar will activate this tool see section 8 1 7 7 3 Grid a k a Coordinate Grid Overlay ctrl G Spot will overlay a variety of coordinate grids onto the image display From the dialog Figure 31 you sele
90. 1 Source Flux Density cerisier rececesetacecececedecwestack covetecececteocacede cece cosecncacececeseckcucacs ankas pa qana 62 9 62 USEMSIIV bY heheh aaa dio tats ale ako Sumu Sa ta a Sha ta e ual ts 62 9 6 3 GomInentS ENEE is irnir as a rasana saca o EEN EE 62 FOA Ve a a P tua n e e a a a Ee Ee 62 DOS Vis Wind OW osna eee aaa EE ates taqaspa S E 62 GR EE 63 IO The Target Entry Didlogiii cciisiccscasccsusctacianicarseiascasievassasscansca a a aiia 64 LOM C Targ tTypeS s ssssasphasuakahakaaqakakakakuqahkahakaqaqhhaqaanqaahanananakanataq 65 TOLI TE in less nanan Qa a Q aa Daaka akak kanaka eA 65 10 1 2 Fixed Cluster Offsets A 66 10 1 3 Fixed Cluster Positions occ ecccessscsscseseeseesesscseescseeecseeecseesesessceessceesseescasesseesseeesseeacseeaseeeasees 67 VOTA Moving SIn8lez au aasan i ea aa eege 68 LOWS Moving CISSUSEsae sua hasssuananaqahaqanaqanpaqhaqanaaaqaqqhanahaqqiaaqakaqqqasas 68 10 2 Inertial TareetiCoordImale SySIemiSsu y uu u dee deed eege 68 TOZI G See EE Elte CN 68 10 2 2 Coordinate Conversion n nnnssssssssnnsssssssssnnssssssssssss 70 10 2 3 Entering Targets at the Celestial Pole 70 AE e EE el Eer 70 AS Vi DEE e ee WE le 70 102922 RENE E EE 71 10 33 Shadow Observations sects l l dE 72 E e E e eu 74 10 5 Bright Moving Object Avoidance ts sus rererere r aeaea i E AE EAE EREE ERA 74 10 6 E e GE 75 HOT C Visibility Windows ics sa nunan ee 76 10 7 1 Visibility Windows for Inertial Targets
91. 1 00 2008 Nov 23 23 57 00 141 8 H 2009 Jun 23 07 05 00 2009 Aug 03 16 11 00 41 4 Y Select Observation Date Date 2008 Nov 3 Time 00 00 00 Number of Points Points 20 z I Cancel OK Figure 181 Target Visibility dialog for Jupiter The Number of Points allows you to choose the number of date points Spot will display for the planet 16 5 Add Moving Target Planetary satellite and other observers may wish to display not only their science target but also the relative position of a nearby moving target e g the parent planet for a satellite Spot provides you with the ability to overlay the track s of one or more additional moving targets on the track overlay of the primary moving target As an example we consider Jupiter and its four Galilean satellites First we show an overlay of Jupiter s track on an IRIS 25 um image after entering the planet into the target list Once June 18 2008 174 Spot User s Guide v18 again we are asked to enter an observation date to allow Spot to select the correct background image on which to display the planet Figure 181 The track of the planet across the image on the date specified is visible in the Spot window Figure 182 Continue to enter into the target entry dialog for moving single targets see section 10 for each of the four moons Ganymede Io Europa and Callisto To overlay the tracks of each of these moons along with the track of Jupiter select the Add Moving Target ut
92. 18 2008 106 Spot User s Guide v18 11 7 2 Enhanced Photometry Mode for 160 um The 160 um enhanced photometric mode commissioned during Cycle 4 is intended to improve both the photometric accuracy and repeatability of 160 um small field photometric observations This mode relies on the same principles of the small field photometry but provides a larger field of view and a more uniform coverage at a given single nodding position This is accomplished by increasing the number of DCEs 30 versus 20 for the normal mode modifying the stim cycle and optimizing the scan dither pattern Select either this enhanced mode using the Scale Mode pulldown menu in the AOT Figure 98 or the default normal mode The enhanced mode represents a significant improvement of point source photometry at 160 um and should be the mode observers employ MIPS Spectral Energy Distribution Unique AOR Label MIPSE 0000 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 32000s 41d16m08 5000s New Target Modify Targ Target List Instrument Settings Exposure Time secs 10 v Chop Distance arcminutes 1 v Number of Cycles 1 v Mapping Mode O No e Yes Columns Rows How Many 3 3 Step Size 1 2 Slit E 1 2 Slit Number of Map Cycles 1 Flux Density Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window
93. 1_irac pts Files of Type Pointings File pts Cancel Figure 159 The dialog for saving to a file on local disk the information from the pointings table for the AOR overlay shown in Figure 157 This file can later be read back into Spot using Read AOR Overlay Mapping File option in the Overlays pull down menu June 18 2008 151 Spot User s Guide v18 S 8 BEE Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool i Zi clo as hole J x f A Sali S WD HB e ta OR az me Wl _ R R ZM Control Q steels Shift Left Button Center the Image at point e Mouse Any iy oo eee Q 2mass k m31 4 E IRAC 0000 cincai e Target x E Ri e Base Image e aja al Observations RJ ISSA 25 micron m31 Ef 2MASS k m31 Total Duration hrs 6 1 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Figure 160 IRAC overlay of an IRAC Mapping AOR on a 25 um ISSA image and a 2MASS K band image shown for a different date than in Figure 157 You can change the date for the overlay by pressing the replot E icon which brings up a target visibility window dialog see Figure 37 Simply enter a new date and time for the overlay and the AOR overlay will likely change due to any different roll angle of the spacecraft for the new date The overlay will then look like Figure 160 15 7 3 IRS Staring AOR The sample IRS Staring uses the
94. 2000000d OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES d EJ d m READOUT_MODE FULL ARRAY ARRAY 3 6_5 8u YES 4 5_8 0u YES HI DYNAMIC YES STELLAR MODE NO FRAME TIME 12 0 DITHER PATTERN TYPE Gaussian5 DITHER SCALE large HN FRAMES PER POINTING 1 MAP TYPE RECTANGULAR ROWS 5 COLS 5 ROW_STEP 260 0 COL _STEP 260 0 ORIENT CELESTIAL ANGLE 40 0 N_CYCLE 1 PECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO S E RESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 7141 4 SLEW TIME 1529 3 SETTLE TIME 1228 0 SLEW OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 U E I I PLINK VOLUME 13728 DOWNLINK VOLUME 151196500 VERSION S18 0 1 NTEGRATION TIME RAC 3 6 60 0 IRAC 4 5 60 0 IRAC 5 8 60 0 IRAC 8 0 60 0 COMMENT START Enter comments here COMMENT END AOT TYPE IRAC Mapping AOR_LABEL IRAC Subarray AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME A Target Galactic COORD SYSTEM Galactic POSITION RA_LON 40 50000000d DEC_LAT 31 32000000d OBJECT AVOTDANC EARTH YES OTHERS YES Kal READOUT MODE SUBARRAY ARRAY 36u YES 58u YES 45u YES 80u YES HI DYNAMIC NO STELLAR MODE G
95. 3 RE Catalo RE 33 7125 E 37 7 7 3 Grid a k a Coordinate Grid Overlay Ten 37 FAA Distance Tool shifte D uu uu nuansa hayaya yhyayiaykhaiyaykysyspaqikayiyssiysysys 37 PAD EE 38 7 7 6 Area Statistics Tool 38 7 7 7 Mark Object on Plot User Created Catalog nsnsi 38 ARS r Current Fixed EE 38 7 7 9 Add Moving Tage 40 RER E EE A0 7 711 Show All Known Moving Objects at a Date nunus 40 7 712 Spitzer Focal Plane cece ceccsesecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsececsececsecececsececsecsecsecsecsececesecececsececececaeeas 40 TEL Gense Focal Plane A ECU R S I u R a A u N a uuu 41 ERIA AORS on Images shiftsetrlsO u u unn n EENEG 42 7 715 Read AOR Overlay Mapping File 43 162 SHOW ET 44 RH Spitzer Bright Objects for AOR eysan E SEELEN 44 7 718 Show Depth of Coverage Maps on Current Image a 45 HS LOPUN MENU sees cee A EE aaa states 47 7 8 1 User Automatic Spot Version Update 47 782 lt SumOnly Checked A ORS ie A TUNU Sa SCO QS Qui QON RENERE SA ERES RESER 47 8 92 SoreDy DEC them Saku u uA Sa uuu QQ Qua A a QR aa 47 7 84 Visualization Spitzer Focal Plane Options nn 47 7 8 5 Visualization Coordinate System Prefs nn 47 7 8 6 Visualization Reddot Preis a u h u H h u ap ah uha nq 47 RoT Cache Prefs cs s m p n u au a a u dies dee aa n E Hatin 48 TBB NEtWOLK PTOXY SEUD ritiene tin pn n u M kau Sh aN ee ees 48
96. 49m5 1 2s M e 2009Feb5 20 C 22h12m43 30s 9d28m26 3s e M e 2009Febl111 CC 22h16m19 60s 9d05m19 1s ih Help d Done Figure 174 List of dates and positions for Comet Encke This dialog box will appear if you click on the icon with the red lines under Encke in Figure 172 OOO Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z I Te Ca T a Loa l rrieeal aa aal e Ski COL ie Jalas BBB m r e Ve ZZ r Controls Hide All Hide All Names 22 USE Make Target Save Mouse Control Shift Be On s Tgt Nam uft Left Gebees Eanes 25s Os ouse Marks NS F Mi 22h00m05 975s senso MII DX a M 21h58m08 38s 11d02m45 6s eee Mix Pi M 21hs6m33 61s 11d12m49 7s amp Un wk Help 4 Done j I MOME Ie ee Observations ME issa 25 micron Encke Target Encke Type Moving Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 175 Adding marks to an Image Another layer called Marks is added to the frame Clicking on the small red line icon under Marks will bring up the dialog box of User Marks June 18 2008 168 Spot User s Guide v18 16 3 2 Adding Your Own Marks Labels to a Trajectory or Image If you want to add your own marks to a trajectory or image select Mark Object on Plot User created catalog from the Overlays menu on the Spot main menu bar Then use the left mouse button to a
97. 5 100 00 5 100 00 LowShortBoth C 6 vi 5 100 00 5 100 00 Low 14 0 21 3u v 14 xli 5 100 00 5 100 00 Low 19 6 38 0u v 14 sch 5 100 00 5 100 00 LowLongBoth C 30 xl 5 100 00 5 100 00 Flux Density Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Figure 89 The IRS Spectral Mapping AOT Cancel Help June 18 2008 99 Spot User s Guide v18 11 4 IRS High Resolution Modules and Sky Background Observations When observing with the high resolution modules particularly the LH module for both IRS Staring and Spectral Mapping AORs it is generally advisable to obtain for a target a separate observation of similar time duration as for the target observation of the local sky background This is because the target spectrum in high resolution essentially fills the whole instrumental array and you will not be left with much sky background to sample in the array itself Up till now you had to initiate this effort yourself After creating an IRS high resolution AOR the dialog in Figure 91 will automatically pop up asking you whether or not to proceed in generating a sky background AOR with similar parameters to the target AOR IRS SLIT Slit Length Slit Width Hi Res 9 9 19 6 um 11 3 4 7 Hi Res 18 7 37 2 um 22 3 11 1 Low Res 5 2 8 7 um 57 3 6 Low Res 7 4 14 5 um 57 3 7 Low Res 14 0 21 3 um 168 10 5 Low Res 19 5 38 0 um 168 10 7 Table 1 The lengths and
98. 6 7 8 8 Network Proxy Setup If you select this option you will see two options Direct Connect to Internet and Manual Proxy Configuration If your institution has a firewall or proxy server in place you will want to select the Manual Proxy Configuration option and fill in the appropriate values for HTTP and HTTPS proxy ports and hosts as well as proxy user name and password It is recommended that you check with your systems administrator for the proper values though these can often be found by checking in your internet browser Preferences Options then Advanced and then Proxies See the Release Notes Cache Preferences Disk Cache Size Kbytes 30000 Cache Dir scr spot cache Cancel Change Cache Dir Help l Enable Cache Figure 46 The size and location of the disk cache directory where Spot stores images retrieved from remote servers is controlled from this dialog It is selected from the Options menu 7 8 9 Use Large Control Icons This option makes larger the layer control icons for both images and overlays in the Images window for better visibility 7 8 10 Visualization Show Mouse Help shift ctrl M If you check this box Spot will display messages in the region above the Images and AOR frames that provide help for using the mouse For example if you put your cursor June 18 2008 48 Spot User s Guide v18 over the image thumbnail Figure 45 far right it tells you tha
99. 8 00 2005 Sep 08 06 59 00 47 7 2005 Dec 29 19 27 00 2006 Feb 13 20 24 00 46 0 2006 Jul 30 10 32 00 2006 Sep 16 04 02 00 47 7 2007 Jan 06 18 08 00 2007 Feb 21 19 38 00 46 1 2007 Aug 07 11 29 00 2007 Sep 24 05 16 00 47 7 2008 Jan 14 20 01 00 2008 Feb 29 21 48 00 46 1 2008 Aug 14 14 32 00 2008 Oct 01 08 27 00 47 7 2009 Jan 21 23 40 00 2009 Mar 09 01 35 00 46 1 2009 Aug 22 18 33 00 2009 Sep 29 23 54 00 38 2 Position Angle Computation Start Shadow End Date 2007 Aug 7 Date 2007 Sep 24 Time 11 29 00 Time 05 16 00 Date PA IRS Short Low IRS Long Low IRS Short Hi IRS Long Hi IRS Peak up MIPS In scan MIPS SED slit D 2007 Aug 07 1 66 44 151 13 67 63 107 93 23 13 63 43 156 44 70 14 2007 Aug 09 1 65 42 150 11 66 61 106 91 22 11 62 41 155 42 69 12 2007 Aug 11 1 64 39 149 08 65 58 105 88 21 08 61 38 154 39 68 09 2007 Aug 13 1 63 38 148 07 64 57 104 87 20 07 60 37 153 38 67 08 2007 Aug 15 1 62 37 147 06 63 56 103 86 19 06 59 36 152 37 66 07 2007 Aug 17 1 61 35 146 04 62 54 102 84 18 04 58 34 151 35 65 05 2007 Aug 19 1 60 34 145 03 61 53 101 83 17 03 57 33 150 34 64 04 2007 Aug 21 1 59 33 144 02 60 52 100 82 16 02 56 32 149 33 63 03 2007 Aug 23 1 58 31 143 00 59 50 99 80 15 00 55 30 148 31 62 01 2007 Aug 25 1 57 29 141 98 58 48 98 78 13 98 54 28 147 29 60 99 2007 Aug 27 1 56 26 140 95 57 45 97 75 12 95 53 25 146 26 59 96 2007 Aug 29 1 55 23 139 92 56 42 96 72 11 92 52 22 145 23 58 93 2007 Aug 31 1 54 18 138 87 55 37
100. ARGET NAME A Target Ecliptic 2000 COORD SYSTEM Ecliptic J2000 POSITION RA LON 5 00000000d DEC LAT 5 00000000d OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES Kal 7 Sal June 18 2008 178 Spot User s Guide v18 List of Targets Figure 185 The target list for the example targets in the Spot target file called spot tgt This file can be downloaded from the Proposal Kit web page June 18 2008 179 Spot User s Guide v18 18 Sample AOR File In this section we provide a sample AOR file that includes examples of the format Spot uses in AOR files These do not use real astronomical targets nor do they purport to show scientifically useful observations They are here to illustrate the format of the AOR files and the necessary parameters Other more scientifically meaningful AOR examples from approved Spitzer programs of course can be obtained from the SSC database using the View Program utility The following AOR file is called spot aor and can be downloaded from the SSC Proposal Kit page When inputting AORs from local disk into Spot you should always recompute the resource estimates using the latest version of AIRE to correctly evaluate the total AOR durations Please edit this file with care to maintain the correct format so that SPOT can still read it Generated by SPOT on 6 18 2008 00 00 00 HEADER FILE VERSION 17 0 STATUS PROPOSAL
101. ARTH YES OTHERS YES DI E BLUE EXPOSURE _TIME 30 N CYCLES SEQ 1 DITHER PATTERN TYPE 5Positions DITHER SCALE small MAP ROWS 3 COLS 3 BON _STEP 30 0 COL STEP 30 0 ORIENT ARRAY ROW OFFSET 0 0 COL OFFSET 0 0 N CYCLE 1 June 18 2008 156 Spot User s Guide v18 hO 6 Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Sala esem Alle ER a as VLE Ra SE z Pointings Table MIPSP Ring R RJ Controls A III GA CAnimation Animation w atral lq i Mouse Control il SE E 7 SS Shift Left Button Center the Image at point On Field Of View RA T Dec Det Mouse Any ANIL See MIPS_24um_small 283 40 33 019 A ee Be Be Oo ee ns 25 micron Ring Nebula WE GE ee 2777 SJ MIPS 24um small 283 40 33 0141 IN MIPS_24um_small 283 38 33 041 V MIPS_24um_small 283 40 33 011 V MIPS_24um_small 283 40 33 019 Mi MIPS_24um_small 283 40 33 019 IW MIPS 24um small 283 38 33 047 1 Roll Angle 57 88 Date 2008 Jun 10 00 00 GMT Help Done D MIPSP Ring Parts i MIPS 160 mips 24 V Show Parallel Data Observations W s 25 micron Ring N Help Done Target Ring Nebula Type Fixed Single Hoes Total Duration hrs 3 0 Figure 166 Example AOR overlay for MIPS PH SR on an IRIS 25 u
102. B image composites 7 6 5 SkyView SkyView image data The multiwavelength SkyView ground and space based image data are provided here They are served from NASA s High Energy Astrophysics Science Archive Research Center HEASARC http heasarc gsfc nasa gov The image selection dialog is shown in Figure 16 Choices in target image size image location zoom and three color composites analogous to those for the ISSA images are available Variable image size limits apply For some image data if you require an image larger than Spot s maximum limit for those data please get the image directly from the HEASARC web site and then load it as a local FITS file section 7 6 9 June 18 2008 27 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31000s 41d16m09 4000s New Target Modify Target Target List Images Available from Skyview xray PSPC 2 0 Deg Inten xray PSPC 2 0 Deg Count xray PSPC 2 0 Deg Expos xray PSPC 1 0 Deg Inten xray PSPC 1 0 Deg Count xray PSPC 1 0 Deg Expos xray PSPC 0 6 Deg Inten xray PSPC 0 6 Deg Count xray PSPC 0 6 Deq Expos ID La Pixel Width 500 Where Pixel Height 500 e Put plot in new Frame S Size Degrees eil D Put plot in current Frame a Initial Zoom Level No Zoom v Three Color Plots Make this a 3 Color Plot Color Band Red x OK Cancel Help Spot User s Gu
103. Crop utility under the Overlays menu and also along the image manipulation and overlays tool bar allows you to crop an image in the Images window As illustrated in Figure 146 once the utility is selected simply drag your cursor across the image while holding the left mouse button and a red box will be drawn delineating the image section you wish to crop Releasing the mouse button will result in a cropped copy of the original image as shown in Figure 147 with the original image left intact 15 1 7 Measuring Area Statistics The Area Statistics utility under the Overlays menu and also along the image manipulation and overlays tool bar allows you to draw either a circular or rectangular aperture on an image in the Images window As illustrated in Figure 148 once the utility is selected simply drag your cursor across the image while holding the left mouse button and a red aperture will be drawn delineating the image section you wish to define as the area over which the statistics will be computed Releasing the mouse button will result in a dialog window as shown in Figure 149 The quantities that are computed within the defined area are the mean flux and the standard deviation from that mean the integrated flux the maximum and minimum fluxes and the aperture and flux weighted centroids Moving the mouse over any of the latter four quantities in the dialog will result in a red X showing the position for that quantity on the image
104. D HI SHORT EXPOSURE TIME 30 N CYCLES SEQ 2 HI LONG EXPOSURE _TIME 60 N CYCLES SEQ 3 LO SHORT5 EXPOSURE _TIME 60 N CYCLES SEQ 1 LO SHORT7 EXPOSURE TIME 60 N CYCLES SEQ 1 LO LONG14 EXPOSURE TIME 14 N CYCLES SEQ 1 LO LONG21 EXPOSURE TIME 14 N CYCLES SEQ 1 SPECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO RESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 3772 9 SLEW_TIME 233 1 SETTLE TIME 74 0 SLEW OVE HEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 UPLINK VOLUME 2203 DOWNLINK VOLUME 23671974 VERSION S18 0 1 INTEGRATION TIME IRS _HI_10 125 82912 IRS HI_19 365 6909 IRS LO 5 121 89696 IRS LO 7 121 89696 IRS LO 14 29 360128 IRS LO 20 29 360128 COMMENT START Enter comments here COMMENT END AOT TYPE IRS Staring AOR_LABEL IRS with PCRS Peak up AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME A Target 2000 COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 12h07m00 00000s DEC _LAT 5d05m00 0000s PM RA 3 5 PM DEC 4 21 EPOCH 2000 0 OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES IS BACKGROUND AOR NO PCRS PEAK UP RAJ2000 12h06m58 39061s DECJ2000 5d03m56 6239s PM RA 0 01254 PM DEC 0 00434 EPOCH 2004 5 FLUX_DENSITY 8 87 MODE STANDARD HI SHORT EXPOSURE TIME 6 N CYCLES SEQ 1 HI LONG EXPOSURE _TIME 60 N CYCLES SEQ 1 LO SHORTS EXPOSURE _TIME 60 N CYCLES SEQ 1 LO SHORT7 EXPOSURE _TIME 60 N CYCLES SEQ 1 LO LONG14 EXPOSURE _TIME 30 N CYCLES SEQ 2 LO LONG21 EXPOSURE _TIME 30 N CYCLES SEQ 2 SPECIAL IMPACT none LATE
105. DICULAR 5 STEP PERPENDICULAR 100 0 N CYCLES 1 SPECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK RESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 6284 3 SLEW TIME 479 3 SETTLE TIME 108 0 SLEW OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 UPLINK VOLUME 5587 DOWNLINK _VOLUME 36987450 VERSION S18 0 1 INTEGRATION TIME IRS HI _10 0 0 IRS HI 19 0 0 IRS LO 5 60 94848 IRS LO 7 60 94848 IRS LO 14 14 680064 IRS LO 20 14 680064 AOT TYPE AOR LABEL AOR STATUS MOVING TARGET TARGET TYPE TARGET NAME d Di d 4 IRS Mapping IRS Spectral Map High Res Low Both new NO FIXED SINGLE A Target Ecliptic 2000 Ecliptic J2000 COORD SYSTEM POSITION OBJECT AVOIDANCE YES EARTH YES OTHERS IS BACKGROUND _ IRS PEAK UB RAJ2000 0h11m55 82000s DECJ2000 6d34m41 9000s 0 055 EPOCH 2000 73 N MAP CYCLES 1 June 18 2008 AOR NO OPTION MODERATE FILTER BLUE FLUX _DENSITY 50 9 EXTENDED SOURC RA LON 5 00000000d DEC LAT 5 00000000d PM RA 0 106 PM DEC E NO 189 Spot User s Guide v18 HI SHORT EXPOSURE TIME 6 N PARALLEL 5 STEP PARALLEL 100 0 N_PERPENDICULAR 5 STEP PERPENDIC
106. Field Descriptions About June 18 2008 Spot User s Guide v18 53 Spot User s Guide v18 8 Spot Main Screen 8 1 Icons Spot uses several icons as shorthand for commonly used functions that are also available under the Menus They are shown in Figure 48 From left to right the icons are OO Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z elei stolz elmlejsalaJe Sg ele Figure 48 The menus and icon bar on the Spot main screen provide access to the various functions within Spot read in AORs targets from a file save AORs targets to a file undo last action next three AOR icons become active once you have defined AORs we lolol delete the current AOR modify the current AOR g 7 make a copy of the current AOR The four bull s eye icons are for manipulating targets new target delete target modify target ele mie show the current target list The next nine icons bring up the fully implemented AOTs Fa aw dal IRS Staring Mode ZS MIPS Photometry Super Resolution GEI Spectral Mapping Mode MIPS Scan Map HH IRS Peakup Imaging Mode MIPS Spectral Energy Distribution ses Aw Di IRAC Mapping Kl MIPS Total Power Mode CH IRAC Post Cryo Mapping June 18 2008 54 Spot User s Guide v18 The last icon bei Show the last computed Resource Estimates brings up a window that displays the time estimates for the currently selected AOR This is the same
107. I NO June 18 2008 181 Spot User s Guide v18 FRAME TIME 0 1 DITHER PATTERN TYPE SubGaussian4 DITHER SCALE large N FRAMES PER POINTING 1 SPECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO RESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 499 5 SLEW TIME 48 9 SETTLE TIME 64 0 SLEW OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 UPLINK VOLUME 1139 DOWNLINK VOLUME 4838288 VERSION S18 0 1 INTEGRATION TIME TRAC 3 6 25 6 IRAC 4 5 25 6 IRAC 5 8 25 6 IRAC 8 0 25 6 COMMENT START Enter more comments her COMMENT END AOT TYPE IRAC Mapping AOR_LABEL IRAC Stellar Mode AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME A Target Galactic COORD SYSTEM Galactic POSITION RA_LON 40 50000000d DEC_LAT 31 32000000d OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES d Di d 4 RI el ADOUT MODE FULL ARRAY ARRAY 3 6_5 8u YES 4 5 _8 0u Y HI DYNAMIC NO STELLAR MODE YES FRAME TIME 2x2 12 DITHER PATTERN TYPE Cycling N POSITION 5 START POINT 1 DITHER SCALE large HN FRAMES PER POINTING 1 MAP TYPE RECTANGULAR ROWS 5 COLS 5 ROW_STEP 260 0 COL _STEP 260 0 ORIENT ARRAY ROW _OFFSET 0 0 COL OFFSET 0 0 N_ CYCLE 1 PECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO ESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 3337 4 SLEW TIME 733 0
108. INGS Legacy project 3 6 um image of M51 mapped into the blue color band Note at right of the image the layer control box allowing you to add other images into the remaining color bands eee Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Zelle 3 S te ste es Be w w w Mouse Control SY Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Any chl_mosaic fits eddies Add Color red Add Color green ISSA Image additional color band to current Image 2MASS Image additional color band to current Image MSX Image additional color band to current Image DSS Image additional color band to current Image Sky View Image additional color band to current Image NED Image additional color band to current Image ISO Image archive additional color band to current Image B Observati FITS File Image additional color band to current Image s Target m51 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 143 The menu of images that can be added into the next color plane The image mapped into the additional color band does not necessarily need to be of the same type Any of the images listed can be selected e e o e Wee June 18 2008 138 Spot User s Guide v18 eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z I Z an AN w w Z el S BRE S afr sa es DUR S AY ZZ _ SE Flux 9 865 Mjy sr _Eq J2000 RA 13h29m53 42s x 823 500 KS 1 Pixel 1 200 Eq J2000 D
109. June 18 2008 118 Spot User s Guide v18 After clicking OK to create the constraint link the two AORs from the AOR table using either drag and drop or the Get AOR button as described in section 13 3 4 The resulting constraint should look like Figure 113 Check to make sure the AORs are in the correct order with the first AOR to be executed going first in the list If they are in the wrong order select one and use the Perform Action buttons see Figure 111 to reorder them e098 Constraint Editor Constraint Editor Tool Add Constraint then Drag AORs to Constraint Window Group Follow On Shadow Add Constraints Parameters Add Follow On gt Modify Paramete Add Comments Perform Action Remove GetAOR Move Up Move Down Drop AORs Constraints Y 1 2 FollowOn 0000 Total Duration 00 33 14 IRS phase 1 IRS phase 2 Help Cancel Apply OK Figure 113 The phase 1 and phase 2 observations included in the follow on example are shown when linked to the constraint The FIRST AOR in the list is executed and followed by the SECOND AOR according to the timing specified in the constraint After clicking OK or Apply the main AOR table will look like Figure 114 Both AORs now have the follow on F flags turned on Spot uses the T G and F flags to report the status of constraints You cannot manipulate the flags directly in the Observations window even thou
110. June 18 2008 16 Spot User s Guide v18 7 1 4 Import Moving Single Target List shift ctrl I Spot can read In lists of single moving targets The format for the input file must follow these rules Comments must start with or Each line should have at most 2 elements The first element is the NAIF Name and the second is the NAIF ID if both elements are present If only one element is provided it is assumed to be the NAIF ID if it is all numbers put it in double quotes if it is a name If the one element has characters other than numbers it is assumed to be the name Ifthere are spaces in the name put the entire name inside double quotes The NAIF ID should NOT be in quotes If only one element is on the input line Spot will attempt to resolve the missing Name or ID Spot will issue a warning message if a given name does not resolve a NAIF ID and no entry for the object will appear in the target list If both Name and ID are provided both will be used as they appear on the input line An example moving single target list looks like the following my targ name 12345678 Mars_barycenter 4 Dione 2000106 604 2000159 Jupiter 7 1 5 Save Target Background Estimates This menu item is only active if you have calculated background estimates for targets in your target list see sections 10 9 2 and 10 9 3 If you select it you can write the current background estimates in memory to a text file Spo
111. N 12h07m00 00000s DEC _LAT 5d05m00 0000s PM RA 3 5 PM DEC 4 21 EPOCH 2000 0 June 18 2008 177 Spot User s Guide v18 J GI We OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS Y MOVING TARGE YES TARGET_TYP MOVING SINGLE TARGET_NAME Encke EPHEMERIS NAIF ID 1000025 NAIF NAME Encke OBJECT_AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES m d Eal MOVING TARGET YES TARGET TYPE MOVING SINGLE TARGET NAME New TNO EPHEMERIS EPOCH 2451325 5 T 2450131 5 LITTLE OMEGA 281 130004882812 BIG OMEGA 78 839996337891 ECCENTRICITY 0 315406709909 PERIHELION DISTANCE 8 159799575806 INCLINATION OF ORBIT 5 960000038147 OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS NO MOVING TARGET YES TARGET TYPE MOVING SINGLE TARGET NAME M Vesta EPHEMERIS NAIF ID 2000004 NAIF NAME M Vesta OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES MOVING TARGET NO p TARGET_TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME A Target Ecliptic 1950 COORD SYSTEM Ecliptic B1950 POSITION RA LON 17 20000000d DEC LAT 35 60000000d4 EPOCH 1950 0 OBJECT AVOIDANCE Kal EARTH YES OTHERS YES MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE T
112. NAIF ID number 10 3 2 User Defined Ephemeris For targets not yet In the NAIF database you may enter the orbital elements The entry dialog is shown in Figure 60 Orbital elements should be specified with a reference frame of FK5 J2000 0 We require the following heliocentric ecliptic elements to specify the orbit of your newly discovered object Epoch The Julian ephemeris date Time Dynamic Barycenter of the osculating elements T Perihelion Julian Date June 18 2008 71 Spot User s Guide v18 Argument of perihelion with respect to the ecliptic degrees Q Longitude of the ascending node with respect to the ecliptic degrees Eccentricity Eccentricity of the orbit in the range 0 to 1 Perihelion Distance Perihelion distance for the orbit in AU Inclination of Orbit Inclination of the orbit with respect to the ecliptic degrees We do not yet have an automatic way to use these elements to generate an ephemeris within Spot Consequently if you need a user defined ephemeris please contact the Spitzer Helpdesk help spitzer caltech edu with your orbital elements and request generation of a Spot readable ephemeris for planning purposes We will generate a temporary ephemeris for you and give you a dummy NAIF ID number to use within Spot so that you can generate visibility information etc for your target When you submit your final AORs please do not use the dummy NAIF ID number but rather
113. NO SECOND LOOK NO TOTAL DURATION 9526 669 SLEW TIME 28 4 S 6 TTLE TIME 28 269157 SLEW OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 L U 1 June 18 2008 F 7282 DOWNLINK VOL ME 159077110 VERSION S18 0 188 INTEGRATION TIME AOT TYPE AOR LABEL AOR STATUS MOVING TARGET p T Spot User s Guide v18 MIPS 24 210 0 MIPS 70 210 0 MIPS 160 294 0 IRS Mapping IRS Spectral Mapping new NO PARALLEL 100 0 PARALLEL 100 0 PARALLEL 100 0 PARALLEL 100 0 NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME A Target Ecliptic 2000 COORD SYSTEM Ecliptic J2000 POSITION RA LON 5 00000000d DEC_LAT 5 00000000d OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES IS BACKGROUND AOR NO N MAP CYCLES 1 LO SHORT5 EXPOSURE TIME 60 N PARALLEL 5 STEP N_PERPENDICULAR 5 STEP PERPENDICULAR 100 0 N CYCLES 1 LO SHORT7 EXPOSURE TIME 60 N PARALLEL 5 STEP N_PERPENDICULAR 5 STEP PERPENDICULAR 100 0 N CYCLES 1 LO LONG14 EXPOSURE TIME 14 N PARALLEL 5 STEP N_PERPENDICULAR 5 STEP PERPENDICULAR 100 0 N CYCLES 1 LO LONG21 EXPOSURE TIME 14 N PARALLEL 5 STEP N_PERPEN
114. OK NO E 179575794 VERSION S18 0 1 MIPS 24 48 234497 MIPS 70 125 82912 MIPS 160 83 88608 RA 0 0 PM D EC 0 0 AOT TYPE MIPS SED AOR_LABEL MIPS SED AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGL TARGET NAME Test Target COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA_LON 1h02 ECT AVOIDANCE CI EXPOSU Ul ECIAL IMPACT T R _ MAP COL MAP CYCLES ESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 2513 TLE TIME 110 98607 SLEN Ou rg Fl HONDHNANN z LINK VOLUME 3076 DOWNLINK VOLUM MIPS_24 0 0 MI EGRATION TIM June 18 2008 SE 1 p e His IME 10 CHO 3 ROWS 3 none LATE EJ m03 00000s EPOC EARTH Y GI GI P DISTANC DEC_LAT 4d05m06 0000s YES 1 N_ CYCLES 1 ROW_STEP NO SECOND LOOK NO SLEW_TIME 56 6 EAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 F 35803026 VERSION S18 0 1 PS_70 62 91 MIPS_160 0 0 187 OBJ MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYP TARGET NAME A Target _ 2000 AOT_TY Spot User s Guide v18 PE MIPS Scan Map AOR_LABEL MIPS Scan Map AOR_STAT US new E FIXED SINGLE COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 12h07m00 00000s DEC _LAT 5d05m00 0000s PM RA 3 5 PM DEC 4
115. OR shown in Figure 169 AOT TYPE MIPS Total Power AOR LABEL MIPST Ring AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME Ring Nebula COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 18h53m35 16s DEC _LAT 33d01m43 2s OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES MICRON 24 EXPOSURE TIME 3 N CYCLES 1 MICRON 70 EXPOSURE TIME 10 N CYCLES 1 June 18 2008 160 Spot User s Guide v18 MICRON 160 EXPOSURE TIME 10 N CYCLES 1 eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Y Gam ed D A 49 D elm eje se EB SCH Sales bi Z 9 Pointings Table MIPST Ring ell r Controls 1 Hide All Animation Animation w T Mouse Control Shift Left Button Center the Image at point On Field Of View RA Dec Det Mouse Any e V MIPS_24um_cen 283 39 33 029 D V MIPS_24um_cen 283 39 33 029 freee S Ring Nebula POss2 UKSTU Red V MIPS_24um_cen 283 39 33 029 zzy D I NWPS_24um_cen 283 39 33 029 Zb SE V MIPS_24um_cen 283 39 33 029 V MIPS_24um_cen 283 39 33 029 V MIPS_24um_cen 283 39 33 029 V MIPS_24um_cen 283 39 33 029 RA AMDE Au can 3907 20 22 NNA Roll Angle 280 65 Date 2008 Oct 24 00 00 GMT amp EEE MIPST Ring fAx alelo SF Help Done T I l
116. OR with the same Unique AOR Label as one already loaded in Spot The default is for Spot to read in the duplicates and append copy to the labels so that they remain unique The name of the last AOR file read into Spot will appear in the lower left corner of the main Spot window You can also select to discard duplicate AORs as well as overwrite AORs already in Spot with AORs read in from local disk Read AOR s and Target s Look In C3 spot EI gl Gei A m31 aor Up to first 15 AORs are shown below AOT Type AOR Label Target Type Target Name IRS Peakup Im IRSI 0000 FIXED SINGLE m31 IRS Staring IRSS 0000 FIXED SINGLE m31 Duplicate AOR options e Allow duplicate AORs with label modification Discard duplicate AORs amp ORs from file overwrites existing AORs File Name m31 aor Files of Type AOR List Files aor v Open Cancel Figure 4 The Open AORs and Targets dialog If you are a Linux user and are trying to read your saved AORs in the default directory of home lt username gt spot you may need to enter the full pathname in the filename field 7 1 2 Save AORs and Targets ctrl S This function opens a dialog to allow you to write out either your targets in Spot format see section 17 or your AORs to text files Spot writes out AOR files with the suffix aor and Spot target files have the suffix ot These are plain ASCII text files created
117. Rs with 200s frametime observations If this is a new AOR please change to use 100s frametimes Figure 71 The warning window which now pops up if you select the 200 sec frame time in either TRAC Full Array or HDR modes Also generally the SSC does not recommend using multiple frames per pointing and advises using dithers for redundancy instead see section 11 1 3 When you attempt to use more than 1 frame the warning message shown in Figure 72 will pop up and should change the frame number back to 1 However for some science cases e g for extrasolar planet transits you may wish to use multiple frames and can simply close and this window and ignore the warning eoo Warning Warning The SSC strongly discourages users from making IRAC observations with repeats Dithering will always result in higher quality data Figure 72 The warning window which now pops up if you select more than one frame per pointing repeats in all IRAC modes O Predicted Positions for IRAC 0000_ Save Table Exp Num DCE Num Channel RA DEC 0 0 4 10 68117 41 02187 0 0 0 3 10 59361 41 11142 0 0 2 10 68148 41 02243 0 0 1 10 59162 41 11303 1 0 4 10 68117 41 02187 t 0 3 10 59361 41 11142 1 0 2 10 68148 41 02243 1 0 1 10 59162 41 11303 2 0 4 10 66634 41 01833 i 2 0 B 10 57877 41 10787 Y lt gt Cancel OK Figure 73 The table of predicted central positions of each of the frames produced by an IRAC AOR Click on the Exposures
118. S Spectral Mapping AOR shown in Figure 164 AOT TYPE IRS Mapping AOR_LABEL IRSM Ring AOR_STATUS new GI MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYP FIXED SINGLI TARGET NAMI Ring Nebula COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 18h53m35 16s DEC_LAT 33d01m43 2s OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES GI DI E N MAP CYCLES 1 LO SHORT5 EXPOSURE _TIME 60 N_PARALLEL 2 STEP PARALLEL 51 0 N_PERPENDICULAR 11 STEP PERPENDICULAR 3 6 N CYCLES 1 LO SHORT7 EXPOSURE TIME 60 N _PARALLEL 2 STEP _PARALLEL 51 0 N_PERPENDICULAR 11 STEP PERPENDICULAR 3 6 N CYCLES 1 15 7 6 IRS Peakup Imaging AOR The sample IRS Peakup AOR performs a one cycle 3x3 map of the Ring Nebula in the blue 16 um filter A 30 sec ramp duration per frame and a 30 step size in both mapping directions are used in the map A 5 position small offset random dither pattern is also used The AOR file is shown at the end of this section June 18 2008 155 Spot User s Guide v18 Ces e e Spot Sg PAE Observations Tool als gala ER JONE me SE a 8 e p l zb r Controls o 9 Pointings Table IRSI Rin Hide All Animation Animation v Mouse Control Mouse fant Shift Left Button Center the Image at point OnFField Of Vi RA Dec De H M IRS_Blue_Peak 283 433 04 gt V IRS_Blue_P
119. Single Position 0h42m44 32000s 41d16m08 5000s New Target Modify Targ Target List Instrument Settings Filter On Ramp Duration sec of Cycles Red Filer 22 um wo kr Blue Fiter 16 um ott Middle Both Red and Blue olko mh Dither Parameters Mapping Parameters Dither Requested No e Yes Mapping Mode No e Yes Pattern Columns Rows Scale e 5Positions Random How Many 5 5 e Small 9Positions Random Step Size 120 0 140 0 Large Cycling Map Center Offset 0 0 0 0 Orientation Angle E of celestial N degrees Number of times to execute this map 1 Flux Density Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Figure 96 The IRS Peak Up Imaging AOT June 18 2008 103 Spot User s Guide v18 11 5 IRS Peak Up Imaging The IRS Peak Up Imaging PUI AOT Figure 96 resembles both the IRAC AOT see section 11 1 and IRS Spectral Mapping AOT see section 11 3 Observations consist of an optional dither pattern superposed on an optional rectangular map pattern see the discussion of mapping vs dithering in section 11 1 3 The AOT provides the option of imaging using the red 22 um filter field of view the blue 16 um filter field of view or both the middle field of view The field of view of the peak up arrays is considerably smaller than that covered in a single IRAC or MIPS 24 um exposure
120. ULAR 100 0 N_CYCLES 1 HI LONG EXPOSURE TIME 60 N PARALLEL 5 STEP _PARALLEL 100 0 N_PERPENDICULAR 5 STEP PERPENDICULAR 100 0 N CYCLES gt LO SHORT EXPOSURE TIME 6 N PARALLEL 5 STEP PARALLEL 100 0 N_PERPENDICULAR 5 STEP PERPENDICULAR 100 0 N CYCLES 1 u LO LONG EXPOSURE TIME 6 N PARALLEL 5 STEP PARALLEL 100 0 N_PERPENDICULAR 5 STEP PERPENDICULAR 100 0 N CYCLES SPECIAL IMPACT none LATE EPHEMERIS NO SECOND LOOK NO RESOURCE EST TOTAL DURATION 4827 5483 SLEW TIME 495 9 SETTLE TIME 515 64825 SLEW OVERHEAD 215 0 SPECIAL OVERHEAD 0 0 UP INK VOLUME 5886 DOWNLINK VOLUME 21822557 VERSION S18 0 1 INTEGRATION TIME IRS HI_10 6 291456 IRS HI _19 60 94848 IRS LO 5 6 291456 IRS LO 7 6 2914 56 IRS_LO 14 6 291456 IRS Brom 20 6 291456 COMMENT START Example 2MASS star peak up Be sure to enter the proper motion for the star COMMENT END Gl AOT TYPE IRAC Post Cryo Mapping AOR LABEL IRACPC Map AOR STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGL TARGET NAME Test Target COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 1h02m03 00000s DEC _LAT 4d05m06 0000s PM RA 0 0 PM DEC 0 0 EPOCH 2000 0 OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES S Di EJ READOUT MODE FULL ARRAY ARRAY 36u YES 45u Y DATA COLLECTION 36u YES 45u Y HI DYNAMIC NO Di Gl Di DO vuv
121. Up to first 15 AORs are shown below AOT Type AOR Label Target Type Target Narne IRS Peakup Image IRSI 0000 FIXED SINGLE m31 IRS Staring IRSS 0000 FIXED SINGLE m31 Save AOR or Target List Save All or Checked AORs What Order e Save AORs e Save all AORs e Original Order Save Target list O Save checked AORs Sorted Order File Name m31 aor Files of Type AOR List Files aor E Figure 5 The Save AORs and Targets dialog is shown with the Save AORs radio button selected In this example we are writing the AORs to a file named m31 aor If instead of saving a file of AORs you want to save just targets to a file select the Save Target list radio button near the bottom of the window The dialog then changes to the form shown in Figure 6 Spot is now ready to save a file of the currently entered targets called newfile tgt Save AOR s and Target s Save In spot ia ls Select a file with a aor or tgt extension Save AOR or Target List Save All or Checked AORs What Order O Save AORs Save all AORs e Original Order e Save Target list _ Save checked AORs Sorted Order File Name newfile tgt Files of Type Target List Files tgt Save Target list Cancel Figure 6 The Save AORs and Targets dialog is shown after selecting the Save Target list radio button Spot will save the t
122. You must be sure to enter here the proper motions for the peak up star to ensure an accurate peak up Spot checks for the presence of and filters against neighbors stellar or non stellar within 50 of potential peak up stars This will mitigate against possible false positives during peak up However the algorithm is unable to check for very bright neighbors to peak up stars Therefore you should always do a quick check for bright neighbors by visualizing the peak up using a 2MASS or ISSA 12 or 25 um image inspecting the image after overlaying the IRS AOR including the peak up option June 18 2008 93 Spot User s Guide v18 You must input a proper motion for this star in the proper motion fields Figure 84 The warning window that appears when you neglect to enter proper motion for the 2MASS peak up star IRS Staring Unique AOR Label RSS 0002 Target Geminga Type Fixed Single Position 6h33m54 15000s 17 d46m12 9000s New Target Modify Targ Target List Peak Up Settings Choose one Peak Up mode IRS Peak Up PCRS Peak Up No Peak Up Peakup Target Specifications Offset Type Dn Asa fo Position A Dec rr 0 000 V Magnitude Instrument Settings You may select one mode Standard or Peak Up Only Standard Peakup Only IRS Slit On Ramp Duration of Cycles Hi Res 9 9 19 6 um eech eet Me sss ie nin D C P nis Ve UE EE H h
123. _95 13h29m56 Fixed Single jz ra IRAC Mapping 2798 nomi M POO159 MIPSI O NGC5194_95 13 29 52 Fixed Single C C MIPS Scan Map 5380 nomi v POO159 MIPSI O NGC5194_95 13 29 52 Fixed Single J MIPSScan Map 5380 nomi Mi PO0159 IRAC 51 NGC5194_95 13h29ms6 Fixed Single O O IRACMapping 2795 nomi vi P00159 MIPSS 0 NGC5194 13 29 52 Fixed Single ii MIPS Spectral 5881 nomi v P00159 IRSM 00 NGC5 194 13h29m52 Fixed Single A P IRS Spectral M 2917 nomi v P00159 MIPSS 0 NGC5195 202 4983 Fixed Single C C MIPS Spectral 3088 nomi v P00159 IRSM 00 NGC5 194 13h29m52 Fixed Single 3 O J IRS Spectral M 5950 nomi v P00159 IRSM 00 NGC5 195 13h29m59 Fixed Single in IRS Spectral M 4354 nomi Mi P00159 IRSM 00 NGC5195 13h29m59 Fixed Single O IRS Spectral M 2917 nomi V P00193 IRSM 00 NGC5194 SL e 13h29m49 Fixed Single JH V IRS Spectral M 1731 nomi E P00193 IRSM 00 M5 1 extranucl 13h29m53 Fixed Cluster IRS Spectral M 7962 nomi Mi P00193 IRSM OO MS1 SL extran 13h30m02 Fixed Cluster _ IRS Spectral M 6208 nomi Mi P00193 IRSM O0 NGC5194 extr 13h29m49 Fixed Single IRS Spectral M 2831 nomi Mi P00193 IRSM 00 M51 extranucl 13h29m56 Fixed Single C C IRS Spectral M 2831 nomi Mi P00193 IRSM 00 M51 extranucl 13h29m56 Fixed Clust
124. a function of position on the image After selecting the Slice Tool utility under the Overlays menu also available on the image manipulation and overlays tool bar along the left hand side drag the cursor along an image as shown in Figure 155 The slice tool dialog window will pop up Figure 156 as a result Moving the red X with your cursor along the slice June 18 2008 146 Spot User s Guide v18 in the Images window will show you the position along the slice in the slice tool dialog window Moving your cursor in the slice tool dialog window along the slice from point to point will show you the position along the slice on the image Letting the cursor linger on any data point in the dialog window will show you the flux value and position at that point Also shown in the dialog window is the total spatial distance of the slice in the distance units you select Holding the right mouse button will bring up a menu of options You can set the properties of the slice save the slice image to local disk you can also do this by clicking on the Save Image button in the window zoom in and out along the slice and set the range of parameters for the slice You can also save the slice data the table of flux versus position to local disk by clicking on the Save Data button in the window OO Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool eis m 9 CREN alale SR s ir Mouse Control Left Mouse Button Click and drag to
125. a target directly at either the north or south celestial pole the right ascension you enter is important When Spitzer is calculating mapping positions and offsets it creates a new local coordinate system with the equator running through the specified target position and north and east determined from this initial position Therefore if you enter a position of J2000 RA 1 hr DEC 90 deg if you have mapping offsets from your primary positions they will be in different locations if you specify J2000 RA 5 hr DEC 90 deg The central position is of course the same in both of these instances Use the visualization tools to see how your observations will look when executed 10 3 Moving Target Entry For moving targets you may enter either a standard ephemeris specified by the NAIF ID number or a user defined ephemeris for objects not yet in the NAIF database 10 3 1 Standard Ephemeris For targets in the NAIF database enter either the NAIF ID or the target NAIF name and Spot will return the appropriate NAIF ID number when you click Resolve to NAIF ID button NAIF name ID resolution is performed with an interactive query to the JPL Small Body Database Browser As this database is updated daily even very recently discovered objects will have NAIF ID name resolution available in Spot If the name you enter is used by more than one object in the NAIF database for example Dione the satellite and Dione the asteroid Figure 57 Spot will
126. al The information returned in the resource estimate dialog includes Slew Time This includes the time for telescope moves internal to the AOR e g to move between map positions dither positions or different slits Settle Time The settle time reports the time required for the telescope to settle after moves internal to the AOR Slew Overhead The slew overhead is a fixed time included in each AOR that accounts for the initial slew to target and other observatory overheads currently 215 seconds June 18 2008 60 Spot User s Guide v18 For moving targets an additional overhead of 300 seconds is included Special Overhead The time required for any special overheads that have been specified see section 9 4 appears here AOR Duration This is the total wall clock time required to execute the observation Estimator Version This is the version of the AIRE server that is calculating the resource estimates Integration Times These are estimated on source integration times in seconds for each array module selected in the AOR NOTE To determine the actual on source integration time at a given position you should overlay on an image and analyze a Depth of Coverage map see section 7 7 18 for the AOR Resource Estimates Resource Estimates Slew Time sec 564 4 Settle Time sec 532 0 Slew Overhead sec 215 0 Special Overhead sec on AOR Duration sec 3 108 8 Downlink Vol Kbytes 37200 Estim
127. al Submission Tool Principal Investigator PD window showing pulldown menu of Pl institutions Fill in allother appropriate fields 14 1 2 Submit Menu 14 1 2 1 Submit proposal to SSC This function will allow you to submit a new observing proposal to the SSC You should have loaded your coversheet information into the Tool any AORs and included the correct disk file system path to the scientific justification file before using this function If there is not an open Call for Proposals Spot will return a warning message saying it was unable to successfully submit your proposal June 18 2008 123 Spot User s Guide v18 14 1 2 2 Update proposal at SSC This function will allow you to update a proposal you have already submitted to the SSC You should ensure you have the proper coversheet information loaded into the Proposal Submission Tool and AORs or scientific justification file if they need to be updated If there is not an open Call for Proposals Spot will not let you submit the update 14 1 3 Help An online overview of the Proposal Submission Tool is available from the Help function 14 2 Add Principal Investigator Information Click on the button Add Principal Investigator to bring up the PI dialog box as shown in Figure 118 Complete each field with the appropriate information Use the Institution pulldown menu to select your institution or type it in if not in the menu When done click OK The completed dialog s
128. and the appropriate additional time will be added to the AOR resource estimate using the dialog shown in Figure 52 Details about Special Overheads can be found on the Proposal Kit web page in the Special Overhead Burdens memo Moving target High or Medium Impact Targets of Opportunity ToOs are assumed to require a late ephemeris update No additional overhead for the ephemeris update will be charged for such a ToO Extra Impact No Impact O High Impact Target Of Opportunity 1 Instrument O High Impact Target Of Opportunity 2 or 3 Instruments O Medium Impact Target Of Opportunity 1 Instrument O Medium Impact Target Of Opportunity 2 or 3 Instruments O Not Target Of Opportunity 3 Instruments _ Late Ephemeris Change _ Second Look Figure 52 The dialog for selecting required special overheads is shown This dialog is reached by clicking the Spec Overhead button at the bottom of any of the AOT templates selected from the Observation menu 9 5 Obtain Resource Estimates Determine how long your observation as specified will take to execute by clicking on the Compute Obs Time button If you are connected to our servers via the Internet Spot will return resource estimates in the dialog shown in Figure 53 The most important number returned here is the AOR Duration This is the wall clock time that Spitzer will require to execute the observation You need to request this amount of time for the observation in your observing propos
129. argets you have entered to a file using the format shown in section 17 June 18 2008 15 Spot User s Guide v18 7 1 3 Import Fixed Single Target List ctrl I Spot can read in single target line lists for inertial targets This function has not yet been implemented for fixed or moving cluster targets A sample file is shown below and the required format of the file is described Spot will resolve the name from the target list The keyword NAME RESOLVER can be input at the top of the list with values either ned or simbad If the target list with this keyword included contains a line consisting only of a target name the name resolver is contacted via the Internet to retrieve the positional information Spot must be connected to the Internet for this feature to function An example target list looks like the following COORD_SYSTEM Equatorial Equatorial Galactic or Ecliptic EQUINOX B1950 B1950 J2000 or blank for Galactic NAME RESOLVER ned Name resolution by either NED or SIMBAD Name RA LON DEC LAT PM RA PM DEC EPOCH NGC 001 12h34m23 45s 34d23m56 2s 2 3 3 4 1950 3 NGC2222 23 56d 34 456d 2 3 3 4 1950 3 NGC4444 12 34 12 23 34 23 45 45 2 3 3 4 1950 3 NGC4321 The first two keywords give the coordinate system and equinox for all the positions in this list these keywords are optional The list columns are separated by spaces If there are spaces in the values for a column double quotes ar
130. arth asteroids this fixed target approximation will provide a clearer visualization of the map extent around the target object but unlike the moving target visualization described above it will not accurately display the background in each AOR frame 16 4 1 Displaying an AOR To display a moving target AOR select an AOR preferably one that corresponds to the target you are currently displaying listed in the Observations window Then select AORs on Current Image from the Overlays menu on the Spot main menu bar You will be asked if you want to plot the same visibility date for the moving target that you currently have plotted Figure 179 If you don t want to do that select No and you will be asked to supply a different date Your requested AOR will appear on the image and a set of icons associated with that display will appear on the right hand side of the image window layer controls As for the layer controls the H icon will toggle the display of the AOR the XI icon will delete the AOR display and the El icon opens a table that lists all the AOR pointings Individual pointings can then be selectively toggled on off in the table This window also gives the position angle for the AOR on the date specified Furthermore this window allows animation of the AOR displaying the instrument aperture pointings in the sequence that they will be executed on board the spacecraft The Animation button shows the pointings one after the othe
131. ation w Trail button will perform the same task but will freeze each FOV on the image as the animation progresses You see the full overlay built up one exposure at a time The focal plane configuration icon will bring up a small dialog window in which you can choose to turn off one or more of the aperture fields of view in the displayed AOR CY See lials B lle Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool POLIO SNES Es EE e JN WE Shift Left Button Center the Image at point s Entre Mouse Any WM eoe W in 25 micron m31 h 3 e e E E g ae e eje e Observations E iSSA 25 micron m31 2Mass k mai Target m31 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 6 1 Figure 157 The overlay of an IRAC Mapping AOR on a 25 um ISSA image and a 2MASS K band image The details of the AOR are given below Spot allows you to save to local disk the contents of the pointings table Clicking on the Save button in the pointings table results in the dialog shown in Figure 159 Here a file name and directory on local disk can be specified before saving the pts file This file can later be read back into Spot as described in section 7 7 15 Currently each overlaid AOR must be saved one at a time to separate files Below are the details of the IRAC Mapping AOR shown in Figure 157 AOT TYPE IRAC Mappi
132. ator Version S18 0 1 li Integration Time IRAC_3_6 sec 60 0 IRAC_4_5 sec 60 0 IRAC_5_8 sec 60 0 IRAC_8_O sec 60 0 Done Figure 53 The Resource Estimates Dialog for an inertial target In the case of a moving target the slew overhead duration includes both the standard 215 seconds for all observations and a special 300 seconds added for moving targets only June 18 2008 61 Spot User s Guide v18 9 6 Other AOT Buttons 9 6 1 Source Flux Density You may enter known estimated flux densities for your targets by clicking this button This information is not used in the current version of Spot but is saved with the AOR Flux densities may not currently be entered for moving targets For moving targets if you wish to save flux density information with your AOR please enter it into the comment field 9 6 2 Sensitivity Spot returns the location on our web site of the sensitivity pages for all three instruments You must access these from your web browser separately Spot does not yet provide integrated sensitivity estimates There are also links from the Spitzer Proposal Kit web page The online Performance Estimation Tools PETs can be found at Imaging http ssc spitzer caltech edu tools senspet Spectroscopy http ssc spitzer caltech edu tools specpet The instrument sensitivities can be found at IRAC http ssc spitzer caltech edu irac sens html IRS http ssc spitzer caltech edu irs sens
133. available directly from the PCRS guide star catalog for reference see http ssc spitzer caltech edu pes by pressing the PCRS Selection button shown in Figure 85 An example of the resulting list of suitable candidate stars is shown in Figure 86 All of these stars are listed as acceptable for PCRS peak up Note that the proper motion for the peak up stars is already included Click anywhere on the row of information for a star to select it Then click OK and the peak up star s coordinates and V magnitude as well as the proper motion will be entered in the Peak Up Target field of the AOR see Figure 85 You can continue to make further modifications to the peak up target June 18 2008 95 Spot User s Guide v18 information or simply view it by pressing the View Modify Peak up Target that will appear in the main IRS Staring AOT see for example Figure 87 Please see the Spitzer Observations Planning Cookbook for a detailed description and step by step instructions for configuring a peak up with the IRS 11 2 2 4 No Peak Up The No Peak up option is obvious No peak up will be performed and the observation will proceed assuming the spacecraft pointing has put the slit s close enough to the target for the scientific purpose of the observation As per Section 3 4 of the Spitzer Observer s Manual the operational pointing of the telescope boresight has an accuracy of lt 1 0 lo radial which should be taken into account if
134. be created The Replication Tool is discussed in section 12 7 5 2 Target Replication Tool The Target Replication Tool allows Spot to automatically create a number of AORs by merging a particular target with a set of AORs If you want to perform the same set of AORs on several different targets you can create the first set individually and then use the Target Replication Tool to create the AORs for the other targets 7 5 3 Group Follow on Constraints ctrl N This tool allows you to apply grouping and follow on constraints to your AORs See section 13 for a discussion of constraints editing 7 5 4 Timing Constraints shift ctrl N This tool allows you to apply timing constraints to AORs See section 13 for details 7 5 5 Proposal Submission Tool shift ctrl P You will use this tool if you wish to submit a Spitzer observing proposal during an open Call for Proposals See section 14 for details 7 5 6 Show Current Resource Estimates ctrl A This brings up the resource estimates dialog that shows the time estimates previously calculated for this AOR The same function is implemented with the clock icon on the main Spot screen Recompute what 5 Which AOR estimates would you like to recompute Mo l All AORs Checked AORs Out of Date AORs Current AOR Cancel L L L Figure 11 The dialog that appears if Recompute All Estimates is selected from the Tools menu The user selects the set of AORs t
135. bility servers to get the correct orientation and sky positions for the overlay Which AORs z Which AORs do you want to Overlay 9 gt Current AOR Selected AORs Checked AORs AILAORS Cancel L Figure 37 The dialog for selecting which AORs to overlay on an image You can overlay multiple AORs at once on a single image O Select Observation Date Target Visibility by Spitzer Target Name m31 Window opens Window closes 12007 Jan 06 18 08 00 2007 Feb 21 19 38 00 12007 Aug 07 11 29 00 2007 Sep 24 05 17 00 12008 Jan 14 20 03 00 2008 Feb 29 21 51 00 2008 Aug 14 14 38 00 2008 Oct 01 08 35 00 12009 Jan 21 23 51 00 2009 Mar 09 01 48 00 2009 Aug 22 18 49 00 2009 Sep 29 23 54 00 r Select Observation Date Date 2008 Sep 7 Time 00 00 00 Help Cancel Duration 46 1 47 7 46 1 47 7 46 1 38 2 OK lt i gt Figure 38 The dialog for selecting the AOR overlay date is shown It shows the visibility windows for the target as well as a date in the middle of the next available visibility window the default If you want to plot the AOR for a particular observation date within any visibility window enter it here Click on any visibility window to automatically select its mid date Click OK for the overlay June
136. bject s path across the sky For general purpose use though requesting the ISSA plates with the default parameters is generally a good starting point for visualization Figure 170 16 2 2 Selecting an Observation Date Once a type of background image has been selected you will be asked to enter an observation date to allow Spot to select the correct background image on which to display your object Figure 171 In the Select Observation Date window that appears Spot will display the visibility windows for your object That is those date ranges in which your object can be acquired by the Spitzer spacecraft Select a date within the visibility June 18 2008 164 Spot User s Guide v18 window periods choose the number of points on the orbital track that you would like Spot to label and click on OK ee ISSA Image Target Encke Type Moving Single NAIF ID 1000025 pos ephemeris dependent NewTarget Modify Target Target List Plot Types Where YP S TES E F 12 microns anel plots 1 per Frame 5 E v 25 microns Put all plots in new Frame A _ 60 microns Put all plots in current Frame Z 100 microns Size Degrees ES 5 000 No Zoom ES Initial Zoom Level r Three Color Plots Make this a 3 Color Plot a Color Band Red Figure 170 The dialog box for requesting an ISSA image of the sky background for Comet Encke Help Cancel 000 Selec
137. bmission Tool Main Window June 18 2008 132 Spot User s Guide v18 14 12 3 Updating an Existing Proposal You have submitted an observing proposal but noticed that there was an error in something an AOR the name of a Co I a rotated figure in the scientific justification file Anything If the deadline for the Call has not yet passed you can re submit your proposal and replace the appropriate part that has the error if it is after the deadline you are out of luck There is no need to submit a new proposal to correct errors in a submitted proposal When you Update an existing proposal Spot will replace the old information with the new For AORs this means that if you detected an error in one AOR you must submit the entire set of AORs again with the error corrected Do not just submit the one AOR You would end up with a proposal with just one AOR associated with it The coversheet information title abstract PI information etc is always updated at the SSC when you submit a proposal update Each time you submit a proposal or update to a proposal check that the coversheet information is correct Proposal User Name soifer_m31 Password lata Submitter s E mail help spiter caltech edu Update Scientific Justification File Update AORs Cancel Help Figure 139 Proposal Update dialog window The coversheet information is always updated If you need to update your AORSs or Scientific Jus
138. bmit an observing proposal you need to have a coversheet file which we just created above a scientific justification file PDF format only and a finalized set of AORs Archival and Theory proposals excepted In addition to the above files you will need to think of a nifty shorthand proposal user name and password that will stick with the proposal for its entire life The proposal user name is not the title of the proposal usually much too long Example user names are lowzgal stars1 and globulars The proposal user name must be unique within the Spitzer mission so if someone has thought of stars1 Spot will let you know when you submit your proposal and you will have to choose a different user name Allowed characters in the Proposal User Name are Ato Zand ato z upper and lowercase alphabet Numbers 0 through 9 e gt lt amp greater than less than dash underscore During the actual proposal submission process you will also need to provide a submitter s email address The SSC realizes that in some cases the PI TC may not be in town or otherwise in email phone contact during the final moments of the Call when someone else may be submitting the proposals and things can go wrong If you are the PI TC and are submitting the proposal simply fill in your email address here one more time After the maelstrom of the Call has subsided the SSC will contact the PI TC submitter
139. cannot proceed without acknowledging the warning by pressing OK and entering the proper motion for the star Please be sure the proper motion are entered in the correct units yr for Spot 11 2 2 3 PCRS Peak Up Targets The PCRS Peak up option uses the spacecraft s optical pointing system for peak up This is useful if there is an optical but no appropriate infrared source in the vicinity of your target Again the peak up target can be specified as offsets in arcseconds from the target or true RA and Dec ee Peakup Candidates h Comment RA Dec PM RA yr PM DEC yr vMag Epoch Acceptable 6h34m31 85s 17d22m58 6s 0 004 0 012 9 350 2 004 500 Acceptable 6h33m17 67s 17d24m34 0s 0 005 0 006 8 810 2 004 500 Acceptable 6h32m30 71s 17d38m53 4s 0 006 0 004 8 490 2 004 500 Acceptable 6h32m02 30s 17d39m54 1s 0 016 0 019 7 940 2 004 500 Acceptable 6h35m53 80s 17d41m33 0s 0 017 0 013 7 260 2 004 500 Acceptable 6h35m5S0 47s 17d53m50 3s 0 003 0 013 9 310 2 004 500 Acceptable 6h33m48 36s 18d04m36 2s 0 001 0 002 9 630 2 004 500 Acceptable 6h33m09 54s 18d07m54 8s 0 002 0 007 9 680 2 004 500 Cancel OK Figure 86 Example PCRS Peak up Candidates list showing stars from the PCRS guide star catalog that are acceptable for peak up All stars used for PCRS peak up must meet the PCRS GSC selection requirements including V magnitudes between 7 and 10 Spot allows you to select peak up stars around your target if
140. control has now been added to the side bars You can show or hide the Target box with the show hide layer icon and delete this overlay with the delete layer icon 15 3 Overlaying a Coordinate Grid The result from selecting Grid from the Overlays menu section 7 7 2 and choosing an equatorial J2000 coordinate grid for the ISSA 25 um image is shown on the left in Figure 151 The additional layer control labeled Grid has also appeared in the side bar In addition to the show hide layer and delete layer icons there is now a coordinate grid control icon RB Clicking on this brings up a dialog where you can change the type of coordinate grid shown in the overlay 15 4 Overlaying a Catalog In Figure 26 we show the dialog that allows selection of the catalog overlays The results of the selection in the figure 2MASS Point Source catalog with a 2 5 search radius are shown in the right image 2MASS K M31 displayed in Figure 151 The layer control for the catalog has the name of the catalog 2MASS PSC There are four boxes in the layer control that allow you to do various things The usual hide show and delete layer icons are now joined by a catalog table El icon and constrain data icon Click on the catalog table icon and a list such as that seen in Figure 152 will appear Each object in the catalog found within your specified search radius is listed As with other target lists you can sort the columns by clicking on the column headers
141. cript or PDF format June 18 2008 122 Spot User s Guide v18 14 1 1 6 Prepend Cover Sheet onto Sci Just File This function allows you to prepend the proposal coversheet to the PDF Scientific Justification e proposal file A dialog opens allowing you to save the resulting merged PDF format to local disk Note This function often causes the Mac OSX version of Spot to terminate abruptly for this reason this function has been currently rendered inactive for Macs 14 1 1 7 Clear This function will clear the proposal information entered in the Tool Spot will ask you if you are sure you want to clear the Tool 14 1 1 8 Close proposal window This function will close the Proposal Tool window When you have finished using the Proposal Submission Tool select this option to close the Tool First Name Last Name Middle Initial Institution Department Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory Southwest Research Institute Space Research Organization Netherlands SRON Street Space Science Institute Space Sciences Laboratory Space Telescope Science Institute City Spitzer Science Center State Province State University of New York Stony Brook f Steward Observatory U Arizona Zip Postal Code Stockholm University Country Swarthmore College Swiss Federal Institute of Technology Zurich E E mail Phone Fax Cancel Help Figure 118 Propos
142. csecsecsesseeaeeaeesecaeeaeeas 114 13 3 3 Creating New Grouping and Follow on Constramts 114 13 3 4 Linking AORs to a Grouping Constralnt n nrnna 115 13 3 5 Creating a Follow on Constraint cccccessesceseeseeseeseeseesecseeseeseeseesecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecaesaesaeeaeeas 117 13 3 6 Creating a Shadow Constramt 120 14 Proposal Submission Tool ege die 121 14 1 Proposal Submission Tool Main Window ccccccceccsssssessesecseeseenecseenecsececececsecsecnecsecsessesaesaeeaeeaes 121 TAAS le Menu wnt ten au u k s Sp aS dh etvatetay eluate enter Sus SSS Saku Saha 122 L42122 ee MEMU inns E E EE T 123 E RS OC WE 124 14 2 Add Principal Investigator Information n nunus 124 143 Add ContaetirlInformatieohyy l seinen eho EE Eeler 124 lAs Ee E swine ein sn honk aah ahaha an brdveamire iin teeters 125 145 Add Proposal ADStraC iere eher ten te eaves in reteset heen tote eee ce 127 14 6 Add Scientific Justinication File k y l S Ee Eege 127 E Wa Add Science Category e dn EEE T ETE E 128 Po Add amy EEN GE 129 June 18 2008 5 Spot User s Guide v18 14 9 Add JointiObservaterIeS L n u Spa EES EES 129 14 10 Hours Requested in the Proposal non Archive and Theory proposals only 130 14 11 Dollars Requested Archive and Theory Proposals Only 130 14 12 The Final Stretch Submitting the Proposal
143. ct the type of grid and where to display it You can now also force Spot to overlay a coordinate grid on every image displayed as well as control the spacing of the grid lines Clicking on the icon in the image and overlay manipulation tool bar will activate this utility 7 7 4 Distance Tool shift ctrl D Once this item is selected the left mouse button can be used to click and drag a line across a region on your image The length of the dragged line in selected units is then displayed both on the plot and in tabular form An example is shown in section 16 3 3 Clicking on the icon in the image and overlay manipulation tool bar will activate this tool June 18 2008 37 Spot User s Guide v18 Which e Equatorial J2000 Equatorial J2000 Degrees Where Equatorial B1950 e Overlay grid in current frame lt gt Equatorial B1950 Degrees O Overlay grid in all frames Galactic SuperGalactic Ecliptic J2000 Ecliptic B1950 _ Always add Grid To new Plots Use automatic line spacing Grid Lines must be spaced between Geet Figure 31 The coordinate grid overlay dialog allows selection of the desired type of grid 7 7 5 Slice Tool This tool will produce a slice of an image i e the radial distribution of flux as a function of position on the image See section 15 6 Clicking on the icon in the image and overlay manipulation tool bar will activate this tool 7 7 6 Area Statistics Tool
144. d a subset of this information PI name title abstract etc will be made publicly available via the SSC website and Spot Leopard 11 Remember Spitzer has a one phase submission see the Call for certain exceptions to this rule You will have to specify all the details of your observations when you June 18 2008 134 Spot User s Guide v18 submit your proposal via Spot Proposals require a coversheet file and scientific justification GO proposals also require a set of AORs when you submit 12 Think of a nifty shorthand proposal user name to use when submitting you proposal It must be unique within the Spitzer mission Check the ROC for proposal names other observers have used Think also of a password for your proposal You will need to provide a proposal user name and password to update any submitted proposal or to modify your AORs if your proposal is accepted and modification is required 13 Save all the AORs you will submit to a file that contains no other testing or what if I try this option AORs This will be the AOR file you load into Spot when actually submitting your observing proposal to the SSC It should contain only those AORs you want to be executed as part of your observing program 14 When you are ready to submit your observing proposal a Start up Spot b Load in the clean set of AORs unless Archive or Theory proposal c Open the Proposal Submission Tool d Load the coversheet file and double c
145. d Chaining Add Group Within Add Follow On or Add Shadow buttons Sequencing Parameters Sequence Parameters No of Days Delta Time D Time Delta Time 00 00 00 Constraint Name Sequence 0000 Figure 105 The dialog for creating a Sequence constraint an ordered interruptible group This is opened from the Add Sequencing button in the constraint editor dialog If you choose to add a new Sequence constraint Spot opens the dialog shown in Figure 105 with the default name Sequence 0000 Enter the time period in which the AORs in the sequence must be completed You may also change the constraint name in this dialog June 18 2008 114 Spot User s Guide v18 Spot uses the name for each constraint to identify it and lists the constraints by name when you write out your AOR file If you selected Chain or Group Within constraints instead of Sequence Spot will open the dialogs shown in Figure 106 and Figure 107 respectively When you click OK Spot adds the newly created constraint to the Constraint Editor Tool dialog shown in Figure 108 If you close the Constraint Editor Tool without linking any AORs to the constraints Spot will not save the constraints in memory Chaining Parameters Chain Parameters Constraint Name Chain 0000 Figure 106 The dialog for creating a Chain constraint an ordered non interruptible group Group Within Parameters Group Within Parameters
146. d images or catalogs Check the Release Notes if you are using a Windows PC and never see the net up symbol This has been noted in two instances and the fix is described in the Release Notes If you see the net down symbol and believe that Spot should be connected to the servers please send email to the Helpdesk at help spitzer caltech edu We do not yet provide 24 hour support for the SSC servers We have computer support available weekdays during business hours so if our servers go down late Friday evening they may not come back up until Monday morning June 18 2008 11 Spot User s Guide v18 6 2 On line Help and Tool Tips In addition to the Release Notes this User s Guide and the Spitzer Observer s Manual on line help for Spot is available from the help menu on the main Spot screen There are also help buttons throughout the program that connect directly to applicable help files On line help is also available in the form of tool tips one sentence messages that appear whenever the cursor is placed over a field or button for longer than 3 seconds Tool tips are used to define acronyms expand abbreviations and provide data entry instructions For example placing the cursor over the new target bulls eye button in the icon bar displays the tool tip that says Create a new target of any type Figure 3 e608 Spot Spitzer Planning Ol el Sege All e a rx r Create a new target of any type Figure
147. dd marks to the image or trajectory Spot will record the RA and Dec of the positions marked which can be accessed under the list icon El in the Marks box now on the right of your image display Figure 175 Labels for the points marked can also be entered in the User Marks Name field and will be added to the image display when the user clicks the Done button on the Marks catalog window The list of marks can be saved to a table on local disk by clicking the Save Table button and specifying a table name and local disk directory in the resulting dialog 16 3 3 The Distance Tool This tool can be used at any time during moving target visualization but is particularly useful when you want to determine the approximate angular separation of a moving target and a nearby fixed target or two moving targets on a given date To activate it go to the Overlays menu on the Spot main menu bar and select Distance Tool Now use the left mouse button to select a point and drag to another point A colored line should appear denoting the distance that you dragged the cursor and the distance in arcseconds will be displayed above the line Figure 176 00909 Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool lal BBW esew Aale Ggslslsis e 2 E 000 Distances Controls Mouse Control Lefi Mouse Button click SC Color Units _Arcseconds SE Delete Highlighted kaa On Position 1 SS
148. de in Sections 11 and 18 9 3 1 Unique AOR Label The first field at the top of each AOT is the Unique AOR Label The contents of this field must be different for each AOR you enter Spot provides a default name eg IRSS 0000 for the first IRS Staring AOR You can use the default naming system or a naming system of your choice You might include a project name or abbreviation with a number or you can use something simple like numbers or letters Do not use periods or colons in the AOR Label field You may use alphanumeric characters including spaces the dash and the underscore _ 9 3 2 Target Buttons From each AOT there are buttons that allow you to create a new target modify the currently selected target or view the current list of targets These work in the same fashion as the target menu items and target icons If you have previously created an AOR and want to modify the target parameters you must modify the target using the Modify Target button within the AOT form 9 4 Enter Special This button allows you to specify an AOR as Generic or Second Look or to apply an overhead burden to your observation Generic or Second Look observations can be marked by clicking the Second Look box in this window June 18 2008 59 Spot User s Guide v18 Extra overhead burdens are assessed for special types of observations as specified in the Spitzer Observing Rules The type of overhead can be selected in Spot
149. e image location zoom and three color composites analogous to those for the ISSA images are available P EEE m MSX Image Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31000s 41d16m09 4000s Hew Target Modify Target Target List Plot Types Where A 8 28 microns C 12 13 microns _ D 14 65 microns Panel plots 1 per Frame Put all plots in new Frame Put all plots in current Frame E 21 3 microns ER ed Size Degrees K 1 0 Initial Zoom Level No zoom v Three Color Plots _ Make this a 3 Color Plot Color Band Figure 14 The dialog that allows selection of MSX A C D and E band images for display in Spot You enter the size 360 5400 6 90 or 0 1 1 5 on a side and the initial zoom level You can also create three color RGB image composites 7 6 3 MSX Midcourse Space Experiment The MSX A C D and E mid infrared images are provided here The image selection dialog is shown in Figure 14 For more information on the MSX mission see http www ipac caltech edu ipac msx msx html Choices in target image size image location and zoom analogous to those for the ISSA images are available June 18 2008 26 Spot User s Guide v18 At this time all MSX FITS headers define Galactic North to be up As such MSX images may appear to be rotated with respect to other images that define Equatorial North to be up Spot does not rotate
150. e AORs in the group will begin within the specified time interval They may be executed in any order within the time interval Sequence ordered interruptible group The AORs will be executed in the order specified and a duration in which they should be completed is specified The sequence constraint should only be used when the science requires sequential ordering of the AORs waw r r mr r r r aa Constraint Editor Tool Add Constraint then Drag AORs to Constraint Window Group Follow On Shadow Add Constraints Parameters Add Sequencing Add Group Within Modify Paramete Add Chaining wend Ada AOR Timing onal Add Comments el Perform Action Remove Get AOR Move Up Move Down Drop AORs Constraints Apply Cancel Figure 104 The Constraint Editor dialog is the tool used to add grouping and follow on constraints You may also create a constraint that requires an AOR to be executed at a specified time or specified interval after another AOR but a specific timing window isn t required This is called a Follow on constraint Follow on Execute the follow on AOR within a specified time range after a particular AOR has been executed An example of a follow on constraint is discussed in section 13 3 5 June 18 2008 113 Spot User s Guide v18 Shadow Execute the shadow AORs within a specified time range before after the primary AOR
151. e Wavelength Name RA LON DEC LAT PM RA PM DEC EPOCH 2008 nov 2 70 eclipl 180 0d 3 250 223 3 4 1950 3 2008 nov 3 70 eclip 2 325 25d 27 5d 2 3 3 4 2008 nov 4 70 eclip3 12 0d 2 5d 1950 3 2008 nov 5 70 eclip4 12 0d 2 5d 2008 nov 7 24 eclip5 12d 5d 2008 nov 7 70 eclip6 12d 5d June 18 2008 81 Spot User s Guide v18 2008 nov 7 160 eclip7 12d 5d 2008 nov 7 3 6 eclip7 12d 5d 2008 nov 7 4 5 eclip7 12d 5d 2008 nov 7 5 8 eclip7 12d 5d 2008 nov 7 8 0 eclip7 12d 5d An example of the output for the first line of the first example table looks like Date Wavelength Name ZODY ISM CIB TOTAL 2008 Nov 02 70 0 NGC 001 5 859 0 250 0 212 6 322 Here ZODY refers to the contribution from the Zodiacal light ISM to the contribution from the interstellar medium cirrus and CIB to the contribution from the cosmic infrared background The total background is also given The units are MJy sr June 18 2008 82 Spot User s Guide v18 11 Astronomical Observation Templates The Spitzer Observer s Manual is your primary reference for information about using the Spitzer instruments and selecting appropriate AOT parameters We provide some additional and repeated information for the individual AOTs here eoe IRAC Mapping Unique AOR Label IRAC 0000 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Tar Target List Instrument Set
152. e needed surrounding the value This is particularly true for name resolving Any lines starting with the pound sign will be treated as comments Proper motion for RA and DEC in arcseconds are not required may only be entered for Equatorial coordinates and must always be supplied in RA and Dec pairs Ifthe value for the fourth column is larger than 1900 0 it is interpreted as the epoch If it is smaller than 1900 0 it is assumed to be a proper motion as discussed above The epoch field need only be entered for equinox B1950 coordinates You need to make separate lists files for Equatorial J2000 Equatorial B1950 Galactic Ecliptic J2000 and Ecliptic B1950 coordinates because the first two keywords define the coordinate system for the entire file These can then be read into Spot one file at a time Ifonly a name is listed in the first field and a name resolver is specified in the example above ned the resolver will be contacted for positional information NED has a more forgiving name resolver so a name string without spaces e g NGC4321 can be resolved However with SIMBAD if a target name has a space don t remove that space instead place the whole name string within double quotes for the resolver to work You can create targets in the format required by Spot with a text editor and then read in these files Samples of all types of targets in the proper format are given in section 17
153. e of the quantities in the dialog is highlighted Ee gen Area Statistics 3 ISSA 25 micron m31 i Color L Save Rectangle k s Flux Statistics E Mean Flux Standard Deviation Integrated Flux 2 619 MIY SR 0 209 MJY SR 43 762 MJY Maximum Flux Eq J2000 RA Oh42m41 28s X 101 000 5 090 MJY SR Eq J2000 Dec 41d15m34 0s Y 100 000 Minimum Flux Eq J2000 RA 0h37m42 92s X 138 000 2 299 MJY SR Eq J2000 Dec 41d29m46 8s Y 111 000 Flux Centroid Eq J2000 RA 0h42m45 00s X 100 500 Eq J2000 Dec 41d17m03 5s Y 100 979 Flux Weighted Eq J2000 RA Oh42m44 93s X 100 503 Centroid Eq J2000 Dec 41d17m19 7s Y 101 160 Move the mouse over the position to see it on the image Help Done Figure 149 Using the Area Statistics utility the dialog window in the figure opens showing the resulting statistics within the aperture drawn in Figure 148 The pulldown menu toward the top of the window allows you to select either a circular or rectangular aperture June 18 2008 142 Spot User s Guide v18 15 2 Current Fixed Target Overlay To see the position of your target on the current image select Current Fixed Target from the Overlays menu section 7 7 4 Spot will display a red box at the coordinate position of the target you currently have selected from the target list The current target is always listed in the Spot bottom bar In Figure 150 we show the current target for M31 marked on the 2MASS K band and ISSA 25 um images Another layer
154. e pull down menu as shown in the figure Dithering parameters can also be selected 11 1 2 Stellar Mode In Stellar Mode see Figure 75 commissioned in Cycle 3 shorter integrations can be obtained with the full array in channels 1 and 2 at the same time that longer integrations are obtained in channels 3 and 4 This mode can be used for efficient observations of June 18 2008 85 Spot User s Guide v18 stars or in general objects that are much brighter at 3 6 and 4 5 um than at 5 8 and 8 0 um This mode otherwise resembles the Full Array mode When Stellar Mode is selected in Spot there are 3 choices for frame time combinations 0 4 sec 2 sec 2x2 sec 12 sec and 2x12 sec 30 sec With the selection of the 0 4 sec 2 sec frame combination a 0 4 second frame with 0 2 second exposure time is taken in channels 1 and 2 and commencing at the same time a 2 second frame is taken in channels 3 and 4 When the 2x2 sec 12 sec frame combination is selected two 2 second frames are obtained in channels 1 and 2 while a 12 second frame is obtained each in channels 3 and 4 Finally if the 2x12 sec 30 sec combination is selected two 12 second frames are obtained in channels 1 and 2 while a 30 second frame is obtained each in channels 3 and 4 The number of frames per pointing is the number of channel 3 or 4 frames If the number of frames per pointing is greater than one then the whole set 0 4 sec 2 sec etc of frames is repeated at each posit
155. e v18 125 10 12d5m10s 12 5 12 5 12d30 00 You may not enter the declination as 12d5 10 This is to prevent confusion between quotation marks and arcminutes or arcseconds when coordinates are read in from a list Declinations are also displayed with m standing for arcminutes and s standing for arcseconds e Galactic Ecliptic Enter longitude and latitude in decimal degrees 12 5 or 12 5d 10 2 2 Coordinate Conversion If you enter coordinates in the Equatorial J2000 system but would like to know what the ecliptic coordinates are at that position simply select Ecliptic J2000 from the coordinate system tab Spot will convert the coordinates to the new system for you Spot will convert and display the entered coordinates to or from any of the allowed formats Note The B1950 coordinate conversion with proper motions included ignores the epoch You will for instance obtain a different value after the conversion if you enter the proper motions as 0 rather than simply leaving the proper motion fields empty If observers enter B1950 coordinates with e g epoch 1975 5 for a target with no proper motion the coordinates will be transformed to J2000 using B1950 and the 1975 5 epoch However if observers enter B1950 coordinates with epoch 1975 5 for a target with proper motion the coordinates will be transformed to J2000 using B1950 and epoch 1950 0 10 2 3 Entering Targets at the Celestial Pole If you enter
156. eak 283 3t33 04 eoe 2mass j Ring Nebula V IRS_Blue_Peak 283 3 33 03 Se D l ES Blue Peak 283131 33 041 IN IRS_Blue_Peak 283 3 33 04 IN IRS_Blue_Peak 283 3 33 035 IN IRS_Blue_Peak 283 3 33 035 IN IRS_Blue_Peak 283 3 33 03 gt Wi IRS_Blue_Peak 283 3 33 03 IRSI Ring S pr gue feck 283 3 33 03 mior Roll Angle 57 87 Date 2008 Jun 10 pa A 00 00 GMT Base Image KEEN Help Done IRSI Ring Parts Mi IRS Peak up Red V IRS Peak up Blue e eegsl Help Done Observations E 2MASS j Ring Nebula Target Ring Nebula Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 2 4 Figure 165 Example IRS Peakup Imaging AOR on a 2MASS J band image of the Ring Nebula Details of the AOR are given below After creating the AOR and displaying the image we select Current AOR from the Overlays menu The area coverage for the IRS Peakup Imaging AOR is now displayed in Figure 165 Again the Pointings Table and the Parts window have been displayed cross hair icon in the AOR overlay layer to show that the various apertures can be turned off or on Below are the details of the IRS Peakup Imaging AOR shown in Figure 165 AOT TYPE IRS Peakup Image AOR_LABEL IRSI Ring AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYP FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAMI Ring Nebula COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 18h53m35 16s DEC LAT 33d01m43 2s OBJECT AVOIDANCE E
157. ec 47d1llmS2 1s Y 571 500 Mouse Control Shift Left Button Center the Image at point al D Mouse Any chl_mosaic fits 2ZZ 7 x S Flux 32 159 Mjy sr x s Flux 5 829 Mjy sr x m Flux 9 865 MJy sr amp S e IEE CIS D Observations BW chi_mosaic fits Target m51 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 144 The full three color composite image display of the M51 Spitzer IRAC data eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z I I Z xz Ta Salle ss eisen Alle PI eee E gt 5 S a Value 24 478 000 DN Eq J2000 RA 13h29m52 53s X 889 500 1 Pixel 1 009 Eq J2000 Dec 47d11m39 6s Y 891 500 r Mouse Control S Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Any g m51 POSS2 UKSTU Red LLL eddies Base Image EIE x S Flux 23 894 MjJy sr x s a Flux 668 462 DN x w Flux 24 478 000 DN amp e S e m o o D Observations Bai Poss2 uKstu rea Target m51 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 145 A three color composite image display for M51 the DSS image is mapped into blue the 2MASS K image is mapped into green and the Spitzer IRAC 8 0 um image into red June 18 2008 139 Spot User s Guide v18 from the Images menu Then select Make This a 3 Color Plot in the Three Color Plots box in
158. ecommended that you always allow auto updates 7 8 2 Sum Only Checked AORs When selected only the AORs with the ON flag checked will be summed in the Total Duration shown at the bottom right of the main AOR table This function is useful for getting the total time for a subset of AORs 7 8 3 Sort by Dec then RA This option allows you to sort the Target column in the Observations window first by declination and then by right ascension Sorting on a column is achieved by clicking on the column heading see section 8 2 The default setting is to sort first on right ascension and then declination 7 8 4 Visualization Spitzer Focal Plane Options This option brings up the same dialog window as described in the Spitzer Focal Plane Overlay Refer to section 7 7 12 and Figure 34 for details 7 8 5 Visualization Coordinate System Prefs This option allows you to select a default coordinate system displayed in the tables in Spot 7 8 6 Visualization Readout Prefs When displaying an image just below the main icon bar Spot returns three different pairs of values for the cursor position Figure 45 On the far left Spot shows the flux or DN value for the pixel and the pixel scale NOTE For the ISSA IRIS images these values are correct For the 2MASS images you should not rely on the DN readout for photometry Use the 2MASS catalogs for accurate scientific data values In the center and right boxes Spot displays two user selected value
159. ectory Spot saves these files in the default directories listed below Solaris Linux Mac spot Windows 95 98 ME c spot Windows NT 2000 XP c Documents and Settings username Application Data Spot Windows Vista c Users username AppData Roaming spot It is important that you save your AORs before exiting Spot otherwise your work will be lost Spot does not save AORs or targets to disk automatically June 18 2008 63 Spot User s Guide v18 10 The Target Entry Dialog Several Spot features are available from the target entry dialog Selecting New Target from the Targets menu or clicking the bulls eye icon on the main screen opens a new target entry dialog The target entry dialog is shown in Figure 54 Target Name required SIMBAD Resolve the Name Visibility Orientation Background Fixed Single Fixed Cluster Fixed Cluster Positions Moving Single Moving Cluster Coord Sys Equatorial J2000 gt Proper Motion w Use Proper Motion PM RA At 0 000 PM Dec Chat 0 000 RA Dec Epoch 2000 00 Bright Moving Objects to Avoid v Earth Moon vi Others Figure 54 The target entry dialog is shown The five types of targets are selected from the tabs This example shows the information you can enter for a Fixed Single target type We discuss below the target types target coordinate
160. elect a Target Ganymede mp Mong vm Moon Ewop mp emgege Calisto Dm Wemegege Figure 183 The Add Moving Target overlay dialog With this utility you can add the tracks of one or more moving targets on the track of a primary moving target Simply highlight one or more of the entries in the list and click OK We e d Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Selva m 9 8 eglem onua ZZ Left Mouse Button Select a point on the Image Shift Left Button Center the Image at point R Mouse Control be Callisto ES ZZ Callisto Target Jupiter Type Moving Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Proposal lt No File gt Set Figure 184 Displayed tracks of Jupiter and its four Galilean satellites on an IRIS plate background Each of the points are for the same dates for all five moving objects overlaid on the image June 18 2008 176 17 Sample Spot Target File Spot User s Guide v18 In this section we provide a sample target file that includes an example of every coordinate type target type combination that can be created with Spot These are not real astronomical targets They are random positions used to illustrate the correct format for Spot targets if you are using a text editor to create a target file The target list window from Spot for these targets is shown in Figure 185 This Spot target file is called spot tgt and can be downloaded from the SSC Proposal
161. elestial E N O Array RowiPerp Col Para Observe the offsets only Bright Moving Objects to Avoid v Earth Moon v Others Figure 55 The entry dialog for a fixed cluster offsets target is shown Only equatorial J2000 coordinates are allowed in this target type Offsets are specified in arcseconds east and north of the primary target position celestial or row and column array Selecting Observe Offsets Only means no data will be taken at the primary target position but only at the offset positions June 18 2008 65 Spot User s Guide v18 10 1 2 Fixed Cluster Offsets A cluster in Spot is not necessarily an astronomical cluster It is a group of positions in a region of sky with a radius of less than 1 to be observed with the same AOT parameters An entry dialog for a fixed cluster offsets target is shown in Figure 55 Target clusters are envisioned as sets of objects that have a scientific requirement for observation in close spatial and temporal proximity For an offset cluster the positions are entered as a primary equatorial J2000 right ascension and declination and offsets north and east from the primary target celestial or row perpendicular and column parallel array The east offsets do NOT follow lines of declination on the celestial sphere North and east are determined at the primary target position when the observation starts If you are making a large offset near
162. ely the result is what is shown in Figure 163 Obviously more than one AOR must be listed in the main Spot Observations window for this utility to apply 15 7 5 IRS Spectral Mapping AOR The sample IRS Mapping AOR uses a low resolution slit to perform a small map around the target The AOR file is shown at the end of this section We use an image of the Ring Nebula rather than M31 to illustrate the overlay After creating the AOR and displaying the Images we select Current AOR from the Overlays in Figure menu The area coverage for the IRS Spectral Mapping AOR is now displayed 164 Again the Parts window has been displayed cross hair icon in the AOR overlay layer to show that the various apertures can be turned off or on Use Date for All z Figure 162 more than If possible would you like to use this date for all the AORs The dialog that follows selection of the date for visualization when attempting to overlay one AOR at a time on an image Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Sege e ZS oje gt Segen el l Ki al eee Zi I OER x ZZ Mouse Any Segel a ae me r Mouse Control S Shift Left Button Center the Image at point On m31 Target ES Base Image D Observations H ssa 25 micron m31 P mvass k m31 Total Duration hrs 6 1 Target m31 T
163. ent XYZ University dataslave xyz edu Resident Theorist Smarty Pants Institute _jinterpreter smartypants edu Help Figure 124 Proposal Submission Tool Co Investigator window Click on a name and the other Action buttons become active Click Done in the Co Investigators window when you have finished entering or modifying your list of co investigators On the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window the names of the first few co investigators will appear to the right of the Co Investigators button and the word Done will appear to the left if all the information for each Co I was filled in as shown in Figure 125 Done Modify Principal Investigator Clear Tom Soifer Done Modify Contact Clear Tom Soifer Done Modify Co Investigators Clear Another Observer Yet Another Observer Observer Elsewhere Figure 125 Part of the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window after entering co investigator information The names of the first few co investigators will appear to the right June 18 2008 126 Spot User s Guide v18 14 5 Add Proposal Abstract Click on Add Proposal Abstract to add the abstract An abstract window will appear Figure 126 You can type in the abstract read it in from a separate file or cut and paste it into the window Use plain ASCII text characters and avoid markup languages such as LaTeX Enter the abstract as you would like it to a
164. enter the orbital elements in the window provided and submit those Note that we require the orbital elements to be entered with respect to an ecliptic and mean equinox of J2000 10 3 3 Shadow Observations The infrared flux from background sources and particularly small scale structure in that background frequently limits the sensitivity of Spitzer particularly at the MIPS and longer IRS wavelengths 24 160 um To assist in background subtraction Spitzer solar system observers will be able to specify shadow background observations for all instruments and observing modes A shadow observation allows the track across the sky taken during observation of a moving target to be replayed or pre played when the target is not there Shadow observations should allow the observer to remove background small scale structure thereby improving moving target sensitivity and in fact exceeding that attainable for fixed targets Note that in general a shadow observation is most effective when taken as close in time to the primary observation as is practically possible This reduces potential errors due to time dependent changes in the zodiacal light and in instrument characteristics and calibration Estimating backgrounds and small scale structure confusion is a required part of observation planning and observers are advised to use the tools available through Spot and the IRSKY utilities to determine whether shadow observations would benefit their mo
165. er IRS Spectral M 7974 nomi M P00193 IRSM 00 M51 extranucl 13h30m02 Fixed Cluster C7 C IRS Spectral M 7961 nomi V P00193 IRSM OO M51 SL extran 13h29m53 Fixed Cluster C __ IRS Spectral M 9226 nomi Mi gt Target NGC5194_95 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 55 6 H Figure 9 Results of the example search shown in Figure 8 The AORs found in the search appear in the Observations window 7 1 11 Check In Program shift ctrl W Using the dialog shown in Figure 10 you can submit modifications to your Spitzer observing programs to the SSC You will need to have your complete program including any revised AORs loaded into Spot as well as your program name and password see 14 12 2 these are not your Leopard username and password You can use the View Program feature Section 7 1 9 to download your program as it currently exists in our June 18 2008 19 Spot User s Guide v18 database or import a trusted version of the program AORs from local disk before modifying the program Any modification to a program must be approved by the SSC so please refer to the SSC Science User Support web pages on how to submit modifications to your approved observing programs http ssc spitzer caltech edu ost 7 1 12 Quit ctrl Q Please be sure and save your AORs and or targets before you select Quit as Spot does not do this automatically If you have modified AORs that
166. erver if the network is down Total AORs Active If you have AORs loaded on the far right of the bottom bar Spot reports how many AORs are currently loaded and how many are active i e the ON flag is checked June 18 2008 58 Spot User s Guide v18 9 Entering An Astronomical Observation Request Creating an AOR for Spitzer consists of entering targets that are individually linked to a desired Spitzer observing mode or Astronomical Observation Template AOT and then obtaining a time estimate The basic steps in completing an AOR are 9 1 Start the Spot software Launch Spot by either clicking on the Spitzer icon PC or running the program by typing PATH spot for UNIX or Linux installations For Mac click on the Spot icon 9 2 Enter Target Information Enter a target by selecting new target from the target menu or clicking on the bulls eye icon You may also read in a list of targets via the file menu using Import Fixed Single Target List Import Moving Single Target List or Open AORs and Targets How to enter a target is described in section 10 9 3 Fill Out an Astronomical Observation Template Select an AOT from the Observation menu The instrument configuration and integration time parameters are entered in the AOT form The Spitzer Observer s Manual is the primary reference for information to use in planning your science observation Some additional comments are provided in this User s Gui
167. esting on Linux systems running with a Pentium 2 processor at 266 MHz and 256 MB of RAM as well as with a Pentium 3 processor and 256 MB of RAM June 18 2008 8 Spot User s Guide v18 3 5 Mac PC OS 10 4 512 MB RAM OS 10 5 1 GB RAM We have tested Spot on a G4 with 512 MB RAM under OS 10 4 and it runs acceptably However we recommend 1 GB RAM for OS 10 5 Leopard 4 Operating System Configurations Supported Please read the Release Notes packaged with the software or available on the web page for more details on operating system issues particularly with respect to window managers The majority of the testing for this version of Spot has been done under Solaris 2 8 and Windows XP Linux and Mac OSX We do not anticipate major problems with other flavors of Windows Except for Mac the versions of Spot in this release come with JAVA 1 5 4 1 UNIX Solaris 2 8 The software has been tested on Solaris 2 8 and 2 10 4 2 Windows NT 2000 XP Vista The functionality of the software has been tested using Windows XP Minimal testing has been completed using other versions of Windows but we do not anticipate problems Due to the security measures for Windows Vista you will need system administration privileges for software installation To allow auto update under Windows Vista use the right mouse button when clicking on the Spot icon and select Run as Administrator You can click on the icon and run Spot normally thereafter
168. et eae tev ae Rate 23 ToN AOR Replication Toole eR RS 23 75 2 Target Replication Tol aieea aE EE AAE EAEE AE A EEn 23 7 5 3 Group Follow on Constraints Ctrl N e eeeeseseseseseseseseeseseseseseseseststsessssrsesesesesestststsenensrseseseseseses 23 7 5 4 Timing Constraints shift ctrl N oe aaa e EE C E aW au Qu a 23 7 5 5 Proposal Submission Tool shift ctrl P nanus 23 7 5 6 Show Current Resource Estimates ctrl A a 23 7 5 7 Recompute All Estimates shift ctrl A n nus 23 7 5 8 Compute Backgrounds from File 24 7 5 9 Memory Monitor 24 D BmapesMenu y aa aa a aaa a u t a u W qu w eter rare 24 7 1 ISSA and IRIS IRAS Sky Survey Atlas n nunus 25 7 6 2 2MASS Two Micron All Sky Survey cccceccscsssesessecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsessecseeseeaeeaeeas 26 7 63 MSX Midcourse Space Exvpertment 26 LOF DSS Digitized Sky SUIVEY sacar ie i eh ees 27 7 6 5 SkyView SkyView image data 27 7 6 6 NED NASA IPAC Extragalactic Database eu 29 LOT ISO Image Archives ege ge ECCE N CE W G a W Gss 29 FO NVO RE 29 7 69 VELTS EEN 30 LELO FITS file from URL gege EENS 31 POAT AL Seu IMa pis screenie apama aaa w aw aa a aa EERE KERE E 32 76312 Blank I ag6ey sua aaa a s a w G u w Be BE W q A ns 33 Tak SOverlays Menu aca sasaqa aa qa u Q q q TS u QS O 3
169. ete een a A 153 15 7 5 IRS Spectral Mapping AOR 2 cece ccesceseeseeseeeeeeseeseeseesecseesecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsesaesaesaeeaeeas 154 15 7 6 IRS Peakup Imaging AOR ccc ccescesseseeseeseeseeseeseesecsecsecseesecsecsecsecseesecsecsecsecsecaecaeeaessesseeaeeas 155 ISEI MIPS PH SR AOR eink enn Dee 157 E H E RE 158 5 7 9 HERE 159 1S DO MIPS rale 160 15 8 List of the Spitzer Fields Of View ccecceceecesssssesseeseseceecsecsecsecececececsecsecsececaecsecsecsecsesesesaeeaeeaes 161 16 Moving Target V istialization ascsiuwasinidsseoaiunadlbaunnduunauulastinw 164 KETA WE VIC Wich una Suphu m A u a un pods s a uQ aw aaa espa k ata qt ayasa 164 16 2 Getting Stated o aun ha AWE Mr erent nate a k Sau aR Sapi A 164 16 2 1 Selecting a Background Sky Image csesseseesecseeseeeeseeseeseesecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsessessecaeeaeeas 164 16 2 2 Selecting an Observation Date occ cceccseseeseeseeseeseeecseesecsecseesecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecaeeaececaeeateas 164 16 3 Getting Fancy enee tee kamaka S hun Wet SM Ee mtv Sk aaa 166 16 3 1 Highlighting Points and Displaying Date Markings on a Moving Target TrajJectory 167 16 3 2 Adding Your Own Marks Labels to a Trajectory or Image 169 16 3 3 The Distance RE 169 16 3 4 Displaying the Spitzer Focal Plane annassa 170 16 3 5 Displaying the Spitzer Diffraction Spikes u n u 171 164 Displaying Moving Target AO 171 164 1 Displaymng an AOR n
170. etween exposures The MIPS Scan Map AOT is shown in Figure 97 For more details see the MIPS chapter of the Spitzer Observer s Manual 11 6 1 In Scan Versus Cross Scan Directions The MIPS in scan direction is parallel to the line along which the MIPS fields of view are nearly aligned in the Spitzer focal plane Figure 66 This direction is also parallel to an IRAC column The MIPS cross scan direction is parallel to the Spitzer to Sun direction 11 6 2 160 um Data Required Checkbox The 160 um data are always taken regardless of whether the flag is on or off see Figure 97 However the flag indicates that 160 um data are a crucial part of this observation It means Schedule the observation when the telescope temperature is at its coldest If your MIPS scan map does not require 160 um observations when the telescope is at its coldest then you should uncheck this box The SSC is attempting to schedule MIPS AORs that require 160 um data separate from those that don t to help extend Spitzer s cryogenic lifetime so please be sure to make it clear in your proposal if 160 um data are required June 18 2008 104 Spot User s Guide v18 Unique AOR Label IMIPSC 0000J Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 32000s 41d16m08 5000s Hew Target Modify Targ Target List Instrument Settings Scan Rate O Slow v 160 um Data Required Medium 1 160 um Fast Rese 7 1 O Fast Map G
171. f bright objects that currently includes the following sources Mars Jupiter Saturn Uranus Neptune and the asteroids 4 Vesta 6 Hebe 1 Ceres 7 Iris and 15 Eunomia You can choose any combination of the checkboxes to fully implement or ignore bright object avoidance when calculating visibility windows This list of bright objects will be updated to be more comprehensive in subsequent Spot releases The visibility window will be adjusted to preclude times when your target coordinates are within 7 of the Earth and Moon or within 30 of the objects on the Others list Target Position Type Equinox amp m31 0h42m44 31 000s Fixed Single Equatorial J2000 lt Omega Centauri 13h26m45 89000 Fixed Single Equatorial J2000 Encke 1000025 Moving Single Neptune Triton 899 Moving Cluster HCG 25 3h20m43 73000s Fixed Single Equatorial 32000 v Delete Modify Show Background Show visibility Help New Target Figure 63 A small target list that shows the buttons for Show Visibility and Show Background see section 10 9 3 June 18 2008 74 Spot User s Guide v18 To calculate your visibility windows to only avoid the Earth and Moon in your target field check the Earth Moon box and uncheck the Others box Solar system observers planning to observe an object or satellite of an object on our bright moving object list e g Neptune or Triton may still select the Others box Spot is smart enough to kn
172. gh they look like check boxes eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z sil NA ol ml S gt Z wlw Seille elsgieig Allge EB le we 2098 D Observations Astronomical Observation Requests AORs bebe Target Position Type pares Eg Instrument Stat Duration On IRS phase 1 m31 0h42m44 Fixed Single IW M IRS Staring new 997 Mi IRS phase 2 m31 0h42m44 Fixed Single C M IRs Staring new 997 v Figure 114 After adding the follow on constraint the AOR table looks like this figure Both AORs have the follow on F flag turned on You cannot manipulate the T G and F flags directly Spot uses them to report the existence of constraints June 18 2008 119 Spot User s Guide v18 13 3 6 Creating a Shadow Constraint A shadow constraint is a special type of follow on constraint to be used for moving target observations You can choose to do the shadow AOR first Otherwise the constraint is the same as for a follow on The dialog window for a shadow constraint is shown in Figure 115 Constraint Editor Tool Add Constraint then Drag AORs to Constraint Window Group Follow On Shadow Add Constraints Parameters Add Shadow Modify Paramete Add Comments Perform Action Remove Get AOR Move Up Move Down Drop AORs Constraints 1 RSR Figure 115 The shadow section of the constraint editor d
173. ghtness button which uses the same background model at 100 um as the Background feature in the Target dialog window If the surface brightness is gt 50 MJy sr an error message will be issued either enter a lower value or cancel the selection You should not press the OK button when the surface brightness reads 0 00 MJy sr Doing so results in the minimum peak up star flux density value defaulting to 10 mJy This value may not be appropriate for the local background and may result in a failed peak up Peakup Candidates Comment RA Dec Spectral Ty Flux Density 16um Flux Density 22um Epoch Acceptable Bh35m5149s 17d37m213s F06 M35 143 369 102 672 78376 34 191 1 997 800 Acceptable 6h34m16 04s 17d48m41 7s M33 M96 105 421 51 066 40 953 4 17 022 1 998 879 Acceptable 6h33m13 92s 17d19m08 0s K4 K5 114 190 0 168 61 467 i 0 079 1 997 800 GOOD for Blue Bh32m0230s 17d39m542s K2 K3 137 499 0 880 74 059 0 293 1 997 800 6h34m15 06s 18d02m26 5s M4 M5 118 023 5 026 64 749 i 2 679 1 997 898 6h35m12 76s 18d03m54 6s F i 44 497 i 0 240 23 757 i 0 240 1 997 898 6h35m46 75s 17d44m27 4s M69 M72 66 801 1 260 25 812 st 0 420 1 997 800 6h35m29 69s 17d58m53 7s M5 53 734 1 131 29 420 st 0 566 1 997 800 Warnings Proper motions for these stars are not included here Observers must obtain proper motions from elsewhere and enter them in the pro
174. given epoch The search is conducted on the JPL Horizons database for moving objects The retrieved list of moving objects is then overlaid on an image The dialog for specifying the search radius and epoch is shown in Figure 32 An example image overlay is shown in Figure 33 7 7 12 Spitzer Focal Plane This item allows you to overlay the Spitzer Focal Plane at any position and specified angle onto the current image Figure 34 When selected the focal plane is drawn over the current image centered on the current target position and a box of controls is added to the side bar of the current image This is the layer control discussed in more detail in section 15 1 4 You can rotate the position angle degrees east of north of the projected Spitzer to sun vector of the focal plane by entering the value in degrees in the small entry field in the layer and hitting Return To move the focal plane overlay to somewhere else in the image click the mouse at the desired point in the current image e080 ISSA 25 micron m31 Z i ii i ii i a PSpitzer F Base Image EES Figure 34 An overlay of the Spitzer Focal Plane is shown on an ISSA 25 um image The desired position angle e g 35 in degrees east of north is entered into the field in the Focal Plane box June 18 2008 40 Spot User s Guide v18 Configure Focal Configure Focal IRS MIPS IRAC PCRS Admin v IRS Short Low 5 3 8 5
175. have not been saved to a file however Spot will prompt you to save them when you attempt to quit the program Program Check In Program Check In Enter PROGRAM HAME amp PASSWORD to check in program Program Name doe_m31 Password Figure 10 The Check In Program dialog You will need the program user name and password as well as having all modified AORs loaded into Spot before resubmitting the program to the SSC You must be connected to the Internet in order to check in programs 7 2 Edit Menu 7 2 1 Undo ctrl Z This reverses the last action 7 2 2 Delete Selected AORs ctrl X delete Delete the selected AORSs in the Observations table If the selected AORs are constrained the constraints will be deleted as well 7 2 3 Modify Current AOR ctrl M Open the AOT template for the AOR that is currently selected 7 2 4 Copy Selected AORs ctrl C This makes duplicate entries of the selected AORs The unique AOR labels are automatically edited with the addition of copy to remain unique 7 2 5 Delete All AORs This will clear ALL of the AORs in the AOR table from Spot This action is NOT reversible so be sure you have saved any work you need to keep before you clear Spot 7 2 6 Delete All Targets This will clear ALL of the targets from the target list in Spot This action is NOT reversible so be sure you have saved any work you need to keep before you clear Spot June 18 2008 20 Spot
176. he color of selected or highlighted marks This will be the color of object s marks when the objects are On but not otherwise highlighted or ee 2MASS Point Source Catalog GE Hide All 3 Show All Names 3 x Pi Make Target Save Table On Hi Shape Tgt Name N Dec J Mam M 2 X 00402165 41 0h40m21 65s 41d02m56 9s 17 3 M 2 X 4 00402006 41 C 0h40mz20 07s 41d06m51 9s 15 5 M x 00403329 41 C 0h40m33 29s 41d11m52 1s 15 6 amp M O ix 00403164 41 C 0h40m31 65s 41d08m01 7s 16 9 M CO X 00401490 41 Oh40m14 91s 41d10m04 1s 16 31 O O ix 00405064 41 C 0h40m50 64s 41d12m41 7s 11 2 M X 00402984 41 J Oh40m29 85s 41d12m20 7s 15 7 M C ix 00404931 41 C 0h40m49 31s 41d07m32 2s 16 56 M ix 00403572 41 C 0h40m35 73s 41d08m10 2s 16 4 M x 00402522 41 C 0h40m25 23s 41d02m18 1s 16 82 M X 00404069 40 C 0h40m40 69s 40d59m08 1s 15 2 M 2 X 00403635 41 0h40m36 35s 41d04m29 4s 16 66 M X 00402459 41 0h40m24 59s 41d09m21 4s 16 2 M 2 x 00404657 41 C 0h40m46 58s 41d13m36 3s 14 3 M 2 Xx 1 00401509 41 0h40m15 10s 41d10m14 1s 16 1 M CO Xx 00404793 41 0h40m47 93s 41d13m22 7s 14 4 M CO ix 00403534 41 J 0h40m35 34s 41d07m32 6s 16 76 Win t 00402637 41 C 0h40m26 38s 41d02m31 0s 13 12 M aw 00404641 41 0h40m46 41s 41d02m06 5s 14 15
177. he main Spot window Check that Encke is the target Select Frame Time 100 seconds Mapping Mode yes and OK for the default in the mapping window Click OK at the bottom of the AOR window 8 In the Overlays Menu select AORs on Current Image Answer Yes to using the same visibility date Spot should now display the IRAC aperture positions on the sky for this 5x5 map see Figure 180 The different colored apertures correspond to the two different fields of view for IRAC Click on the IRAC display layer control pointings icon E Select Animation w Trail Note that the mapping path that IRAC may generally take is a zig zag shape on the sky as compared to the 5x5 square that would be expected for a fixed target This is because the spacecraft tracking of the rapidly moving Encke is being superimposed on the mapping motions of the IRAC map Note that the Spitzer pipeline has the capability to take these frames and recreate the map of the target in the target s rest frame This will be a rectilinear map with the tracked extended target reassembled as a continuous image but with the disjoint pieces of sky background that you may see ee Select Observation Date Target Visibility by Spitzer Target Name Jupiter Window opens Window closes Duration 2006 Jul 21 04 33 00 2006 Aug 31 15 31 00 41 5 2007 Mar 31 09 42 00 2007 May 09 00 55 00 38 6 2007 Aug 31 14 58 00 2007 Oct 12 09 13 00 41 8 2008 May 09 20 35 00 2008 Jun 19 10 59 00 40 6 2008 Oct 13 04 2
178. he search uses the target name not the target coordinates to locate an image in the database An example for M31 is shown in Figure 17 If Spot cannot find the image by target name you will have to retrieve it directly from NED and load it as a FITS file section 7 6 9 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31000s 41d16m09 4000s New Target Modify Target Target List Tgt Name RA Dec OBS _ID ISO CAMO1 Ima 0h41m05 80798s 41d16m47 4320s 39903101 ISO CAM01 Ima 0h41m11 83920s 41d16m57 4680s 39903102 ISO CAM01 Ima 0h41m17 86812s 41d16m57 3240s 39903103 Where Panel plots 1 per Frame Initial Zoom Level No Zoom E Put all plots in new Frame Put all plots in current Frame Three Color Plots C Make this a 3 Color Plot Color Band Red K Figure 18 The listing of the images available from the ISO Data Archive for the sample target M31 You enter the initial zoom level You can also create three color RGB image composites 7 6 7 ISO Image Archive Spot will display a list of images that are available for the target from the Infrared Space Observatory ISO Data Archive http www iso vilspa esa es ida This service is still preliminary and will be improved in future releases For the moment only the ISOCAM CAMO1 photometric images are served An example for M31 is shown in Figure 18 Input Enter the angular size of the region of interest i
179. heck that all the information is correct especially Total Hours requested or Dollars Requested the requested proprietary period and the scientific justification file e Click on the Submit Menu in the Proposal Submission Tool and select Submit proposal to SSC for a new proposal f Enter your proposal user name and provide a password when prompted g When finished Spot will inform you that the proposal has been successfully submitted to the SSC You will also receive a confirmation email 15 Prior to the deadline for the Call for Proposals you can update any submitted proposal This is a handy feature if you noticed a significant error in the AORs you submitted in the scientific justification file or in any other aspect of your proposal To update your submitted observing proposal a Load in the coversheet file Spot prompted you to save when you submitted your proposal for the first time it now contains the proposal user name which is needed for Updates Change any appropriate coversheet information c If you needed to modify any AORs you must re submit the entire set of AORs complete replacement of all AORs submitted Load them into Spot d Click on the Submit Menu in the Proposal Submission Tool and select Update proposal at SSC e Spot will confirm that the Update was successfully received at the SSC You will also receive an email confirmation NOTE DDT proposals must be submitted to the SSC using the on
180. his controls the viewing of Spot Tips You can turn on off the display of the Tip Of The Day You can also browse through the Tips ning Observations L B 1 ISSA 12 micron m31 2 2MASS k m i Figure 47 The Window menu allows you to select which image you would like at the front This is useful when managing multiple windows on a small screen 7 10 3 AOR File Format Changes AORs created with older versions of Spot may be changed when read into the current version These changes mainly handle keyword changes between the versions The June 18 2008 49 Spot User s Guide v18 changes that have been made for each version of Spot are listed with the most recent changes shown first 7 10 4 AOT Field Descriptions This shows a table that lists all the fields that can be entered in the AOTs The allowed and default values are shown here 7 10 5 About This function reports the version of Spot running on your computer and the version of the AIRE server at the SSC that you are accessing to calculate resource estimates In the next section we provide a summary list of the functions available from all of the Spot menus a k a the cheetah sheet June 18 2008 50 Spot User s Guide v18 7 11 Spot v18 Menu Command Summary a k a the Cheetah Sheet D FIL M ENU EDIT M Open AOR s and Target s Save AOR s and Target s Import Fixed Single target list Import Moving Single target lis Sa
181. hould look like Figure 119 The Tool Main Window will now show the PI s name to the right of the Add PI button and a status to the left Figure 120 If you fill out some of the PI or Contact information but leave some required fields blank Spot will close the PI Contact dialog box but indicate some information is missing by an Incomplete in red to the left of the appropriate box as in Figure 121 You can save to disk incomplete coversheets Be sure to complete all the information before you actually submit the proposal to the SSC First Name Tom Last Name Soifer Middle Initial Institution Spitzer Science Center w Spitzer Science Center Department Street Street 1200 E California Blvd City Pasadena State Province California California Zip Postal Code 91125 Country United States w United States E mail help spitzer caltech edu Phone 1 626 395 8000 Fax OK Cancel Help Figure 119 Proposal Submission Tool Principal Investigator PI window with completed fields 14 3 Add Contact Information If the Contact Info fields are empty when you fill out the PI information Spot will automatically duplicate the PI information into the Contact fields i e the default is PI Technical Contact If you do not wish to specify a different Technical Contact TC for your proposal you can move on to adding co investigators June 18 2008 124 Spot User s Guide v18 If you would like to specif
182. ialog Click Add Shadow to create a new constraint June 18 2008 120 Spot User s Guide v18 14 Proposal Submission Tool The Proposal Submission Tool will allow you to submit to the SSC all the necessary information needed to process your science observing proposals You do not need to be connected to the Internet to fill out the requested information It can be entered saved to local disk and later modified if needed as a coversheet cs file When you are ready to submit your proposal to the SSC you only need to ensure you are connected to the Internet load a set of AORs into the AOR window open the Proposal Submission Tool and open you coversheet file and click on Submit in the Proposal Submission Tool toolbar Refer to the current Spitzer Call for Proposals and Proposal Kit web site for more information about creating and submitting your Spitzer observing proposal N B Use Check In Program see section 7 1 11 to submit modifications to existing observing programs Also proposals for Director s Discretionary Time DDT must be submitted using a separate online submission form not using Spot for complete instructions please see http ssc spitzer caltech edu geninfo ddt 14 1 Proposal Submission Tool Main Window Clicking on Proposal Submission Tool under the Tools Menu on the Spot toolbar will bring up the Proposal Submission Tool Main window shown in Figure 116 File Submit Help E
183. ich is still being corrected Your actual observations will be executed correctly Details of the MIPS SED AOR shown in Figure 168 AOT TYPE MIPS SED AOR LABEL MIPSE Ring AOR STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME Ring Nebula COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 18h53m35 16s DEC_LAT 33d01m43 2s OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES SED EXPOSURE TIME 10 CHOP DISTANCE 1 N CYCLES 1 SED MAP COLS 3 ROWS 3 COL STEP 1 2 ROW STEP 1 2 N MAP CYCLES 1 15 7 10 MIPS Total Power AOR The sample MIPS Total Power AOR chops between sky and an internal dark position using the scan mirror This mode is useful for determining the absolute sky brightness particularly for photometry of extended objects The example AOR file is shown at the end of this section We use an image of the Ring Nebula simply to illustrate the overlay After creating the AOR and displaying the images we select Current AOR from the Overlays menu The area coverage for the Total Power AOR is now displayed in Figure 169 The default now is not to show parallel data in each channel in the overlay To show parallel data click on the focal plane configuration icon ECH which brings up the focal plane dialog Then click on Show Parallel Data as shown in the figure Details of the MIPS Total Power A
184. icons in the main Spot window Clicking on the Line Color or Point Color buttons allows interactive selection from color tables for line and point color The Save Table button allows the user to save the table text Oe the date RA and Dec as a plain text file June 18 2008 167 Spot User s Guide v18 e oe Encke i Controls Hide All Points Show All Dates x Ri Point Color Make Target Save Table On Hi Shape Tgt Name H Dec S W D 20080Oct250 22hl8m03 35s 9d36m31 3s We 20080ct302 C 22h13m21 84s 10d00m55 2s M e zizong Novs 16 C 22h09m07 59s 10d22m32 7s M pe 2008Nov111 C 22h05m24 18s 10d41m08 2s M e 2008Nov170 C 22h02m14 10s 10d56m32 2s M Ce 42008 Nov222 CC 21h59m38 85s 11d08m40 5s M Ce 2008Nov28 1 J 21h57m39 05s 11d17m33 0s M pe 2008Dec411 21h56m14 56s 11d23m12 9s M O le 2008 Dec 100 C 21h55m24 65s 11d25m45 6s M m ix MF 2008 Dec 160 C 21h55m08 10s 11d25m18 1s _ M 2008 Dec 211 C 21h55m23 37s 11d21m58 3s M Ce 2008 Dec 271 C 21h56m08 68s 11d15m54 5s M Ole 2009Jan2 06 J 21hS7m22 11s 11d07m15 1s M Ce 42009jan8 00 C 21h59m01 67s 10d56m08 7s M Ole 2009Jan13 1 22h01m05 39s 10d42m43 3s M O le 2009jJan191 J 22h03m31 28s 10d27m06 9s M Ce 42009jan250 J 22h06m17 44s 10d09m27 1s M 2009Jan310 22h09m22 03s 9d
185. ide v18 Figure 16 The SkyView image selection dialog is shown You enter the size in arcseconds arcminutes or degrees on a side and the initial zoom level You can also create three color RGB image composites NED Image Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31000s 41d16m09 4000s Hew Target Modify Target Target List Preview Description Band Size arcmin Source File Size 7 65 MB Target m34 Reference 1994DSS 1 0000 Telescope palomarschmidt newopticg iiiaj 56 0 x 56 0 m31 Target m i File Size 276 KB Reference 1983MNRAS 205 787U Telescope mrao 89 6 x 89 6 Gi Wie Target m i File Size 276 KB Daten MOON sin AS AOE Tamu 89 6 x 89 6 re e Panel plots 1 per Frame Initial Zoom Level Put all plots in new Frame Put all plots in current Frame Three Color Plots Color Band Red E No Zoom C Make this a 3 Color Plot June 18 2008 Cancel Help Figure 17 The listing of the images available from NED for the sample target M31 You enter the initial zoom level You can also create three color RGB image composites 28 Spot User s Guide v18 7 6 6 NED NASA IPAC Extragalactic Database Spot will display a list of images that are available for the target from NED http nedwww ipac caltech edu T
186. ides several dither pattern options These are designed for small scale moves around your target positions See the Spitzer Observer s Manual for details about the dither patterns You may use both mapping and dithering at the same time e g covering a large area of the sky with the mapping option and increasing your depth of coverage and resolution with a dither pattern 11 1 4 Map Rows and Columns Figure 76 illustrates the relationship between IRAC map rows and columns It shows 1 row and 4 columns versus 4 rows and 1 column The IRAC map columns are parallel to the MIPS in scan direction and the IRAC map rows are parallel to the MIPS cross scan direction The IRAC map rows and MIPS cross scan direction are both parallel to the Spitzer to Sun vector from which the position angle of the focal plane is reported by Spot see section 10 8 e0e IRAC Post Cryo Mapping Unique AOR Label IRACPC 0000 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target ModifyTar Target List Instrument Settings Readout Mode For each Pointing Field of View Data Collection Fe Full Arra a s y WM 3 6um MA 3 6um Number of Frames 2 _ High Dynamic Range EI EI 6 Saum Soum Frame Time secs PAREN L 30 L K k F a 100 Mapping and Dithering 200 Mapping Mode 400 Ww No Yes Set Mapping Parameters Dither Pattern saa 2 No Yes Set Dither Parameters Flux Density Calc
187. ield Of View RA Dec Det Mi MIPS_70um_scan 10 1 686 stim V MIPS_70um_scan Any Mouse 10 31741 686 stim A 10 32141 683 IN MIPS_70um_scan ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZz V MIPS_70um_scan IN MIPS_70um_scan IN MIPS_70um_scan IRIS 25 micron m31 KA 10 33141 672 10 33441 669 10 34441 658 10 34841 655 IN MIPS_70um_scan 10 35841 644 V MIPS_70um_scan 10 36141 641 Vi MIPS_70um_scan 10 37141 630 M MIPS_70um_scan 10 37541 627 Roll Angle 54 39 Date 2008 Sep 7 00 00 GMT KWE MIPSC M3 1 ee Se Help Done MIPSC M31 Parts V MIPS 160 mips 24 4 E Help Observations Target m31 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 0 5 Figure 167 Example MIPS Scan AOR overlay on an ISSA 25 wm image of M31 Details of the AOR are given below Details of the MIPS Scan AOR shown in Figure 167 AOT TYPE MIPS Scan Map June 18 2008 158 Spot User s Guide v18 AOR LABEL MIPSC M31 AOR_STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME M31 COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 0h42m44 32s DEC _LAT 41d16m08 5s OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES REQUIRE 160 YES SCAN RATE medium FAST RESET 160 NO STEP SIZE TURNAROUND 148 FORWARD 148 N SCAN LEGS 2 N MAP CYCLES 1 SCAN LEG LENGTH 1
188. ieron u l EEN 172 1642 AnlTlustrativeExampley u i u u S n Sq W G snack S S O u w G VOCE 173 16 5 Add Moving Targ tuza ansa awasqan qaqas EENEG 174 I7 Sample Spot TargetHil __uan s saaakahaasapahaymaypipa A aaa squa 177 18 Sample AOR EE 180 June 18 2008 6 Spot User s Guide v18 1 Introduction Welcome to Spot the tool for planning Spitzer observations and submitting proposals The Spot software is available to download from the Proposal Kit page at the Spitzer Science Center SSC web site http ssc spitzer caltech edu propkit spot The process of planning a Spitzer observation with Spot consists of entering targets that are individually linked to a desired Spitzer observing mode via an Astronomical Observation Template AOT The instrument parameters that completely specify the observation are entered via the AOT The complete target instrument information results in an Astronomical Observation Request AOR the primary unit of Spitzer observing Spot allows you to determine how much time will be required to execute the observation by obtaining an estimate from the AIRE AOR Interpreter and Resource Estimator server software at the SSC This is the amount of time you must request for this AOR in your observing proposal This User s Guide provides information about how the Spot software works The Release Notes that are packaged with the software provide additional information about computer platforms supported for this vers
189. ight central source for which you have an accurate position but wish to observe offset regions around it 10 1 3 Fixed Cluster Positions Fixed cluster positions is for entry of multiple absolute positions where no two positions are separated by more than 2 An entry dialog for a fixed cluster positions target is shown in Figure 56 Target Name required Resolve To Naif ID Dione Visibility Orientation Background Fixed Single Fixed Cluster Fixed Cluster Positions Moving Single Moving Cluster Standard Ephemeris User Defined Ephemeris NAIF ID Get Target Name Bright Moving Objects to Avoid v Earth Moon Figure 57 The moving single target entry dialog is shown with the name Dione entered It will find the list of NAIF IDs for you to choose from to specify Dione the satellite versus Dione the asteroid see Figure 58 June 18 2008 67 Spot User s Guide v18 10 1 4 Moving Single A moving single target is a single object that requires Solar System tracking Entry of moving targets is discussed in more detail in section 10 3 and the entry dialog is shown in Figure 57 Please choose one object Object Name NAIF ID Primary Designation Dione 106 Dione 2000106 ox Figure 58 The choices of NAIF ID numbers for Dione are shown It is important to select the correct NAIF ID for your object as the NAIF ID
190. ility under the Overlays menu The resulting dialog is shown in Figure 183 You can select all or some of the moons in the list in this case we have selected all four moons by highlighting the entries in the dialog and clicking OK Each of the moons tracks is then overlaid on the image along with Jupiter Figure 184 The points shown for each of the moons are for the same dates as those of the planet If one or more of your other target does NOT cross the image in the date range specified for the first target Spot will display a window to that effect and ask you whether you would like to see the position of the second target relative to the first on an All Sky image The sky patch labeled Sky Image will show the image area that contains your first target and your second target will be labeled by name elsewhere on the All Sky Image eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Sala m DW ejs e Alle a as w e Z S Se G KE WH D Mouse Control Left Mouse Button Select a point on the Image zy lt Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Jupiter hag OO IRIS 25 micron Jupiter e i 2 ge ZZ a E El Observations IRIS 25 micron Jupiter Target Jupiter Type Moving Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 182 Displayed track of Jupiter on an IRIS plate background The Number of Points selected was 20 June 18 2008 175 Spot User s Guide v18 S
191. instructions provided on the Spitzer Science Center web site on the Proposal Kit page SES 009 Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Jalala IDD e s e ls Esl 4 4 Mouse Contgolj Left Mouse Button Move Focal Plane Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Spitzer Focal eee ISSA 25 micron Encke ZZ Spitzer 35 00 x o s Distance i M py Target Encke Type Moving Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 177 Displaying the Spitzer Focal Plane A position angle of 35 is shown 16 3 4 Displaying the Spitzer Focal Plane To display the Spitzer Focal Plane to scale go to the Overlays menu in the main Spot menu bar and select Spitzer Focal Plane The focal plane to scale will appear on your image Clicking the left mouse button at a position on the image will re center the focal plane at the click point Note the cluster of mini icons labeled Spitzer that have appeared on the right of the image window Figure 177 The box with the number in it shows the position angle of the focal plane The focal plane is generated at a default position angle of 0 0 To visualize the focal plane on a particular date use the Visibility Orientation capability in the Spot target entry window the bulls eye symbol on the Spot main menu bar Enter your moving target and determine
192. ion Mapping and dithering parameters can also be selected 608 IRAC Mapping Unique AOR Label IRAC 0000 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Tar Target List Instrument Settings Readout Mode Field of View For each Pointing Full Array V 3 6um 5 8um nberor Pamas Ge J High Dynamic Range mM 4 5um 8 0um Gs fei Stellar Mode Frame Time secs N i O Subarray 2x2 12 2x12 30 Mapping and Dithering sss Mapping Mode No Yes Dither Pattern No Q Yes Flux Density Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Exposures R Help Cancel OK Figure 75 IRAC Stellar Mode dialog June 18 2008 86 Spot User s Guide v18 11 1 3 Mapping versus Dithering As a clarification some observers use the terms mapping and dithering interchangeably but for the IRAC Mapping AOT they mean the following please see the discussion in the IRAC Spitzer Observer s Manual regarding dithering mapping and repeats Mapping The mapping dialog allows you to create a map on the sky with the grid laid out in either array coordinates or celestial coordinates If you select the celestial coordinate orientation for your map the orientation of the IRAC arrays on the sky will be determined by the position angle of the Spitzer focal plane at the time the obser
193. ion better destriping and zero levels compatible with DIRBE For more details about IRIS see http www cita utoronto ca mamd IRIS As a new feature of Spot these images are also now available Input the desired image size in arcseconds arcminutes or degrees and select the desired initial zoom level no zoom 2x 3x etc These images are served directly from IRSA the InfraRed Science Archive http irsa ipac caltech edu The dialog for ISSA IRIS image selection is shown in Figure 12 The target buttons allow you to select or change the desired target region Three choices for how the images are displayed are given in the Where box The default is to put each image into its own frame All the plots may alternatively be put into the same frame stacked on top of each other This saves space on a small screen You can also create three color composite image displays as well Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31000s 41d16m09 4000s New Target Modify Target Target List Where Plot Types Panel plots 1 per Frame J 1 25 microns Put all plots in new Frame H 1 65 microns Put all plots in current Frame v K 2 17 microns Size Arc Seconds 500 0 Initial Zoom Level No Zoom v Three Color Plots Make this a 3 Color Plot Color Band Figure 13 The dialog that allows selection of 2MASS J H or K band images for display in Spot You enter the size 50 50
194. ion performance issues and a list of known bugs A list of bugs issues is updated regularly on the Proposal Kit web page http ssc spitzer caltech edu propkit To make using Spot and planning your Spitzer observations easier we recommend that you 1 Read the relevant sections of the Spitzer Observer s Manual available on the SSC website to decide how best to implement your observations 2 Read the Release Notes that are packaged with the software or download them from the web page Some but not all of that information is repeated here 3 Check the Proposal Kit web page for additional information in helping you plan your observations Check the known bugs issues list on the web page as well 4 Save your AORs often Spot does not save your work to disk automatically Given the variety of operating systems we support we cannot guarantee that it won t crash Saving your work often will make these events though rare much less painful Please email us at the Spitzer Help Desk help spitzer caltech edu with any questions or comments June 18 2008 7 Spot User s Guide v18 2 Whatis new in Spot Several items have changed in this version of Spot In addition we have added a number of new features We have attempted to encapsulate in the list below the most obvious changes that affect users the most Provide Exposures table for IRAC AOTs Allow for switching between array and celestial coordinates for Fixed
195. ion upa taskat a au Sau cuits its ale dune aka aya a teen bau ui ES 10 KE Ee EE le BN EE 10 6 General Information a scnssetsstasecacdivancdsdionseadsceaeristisaacisaiene AEN 11 6 1 Client Server Software Interactions ccc cecscssesseseesecseesecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecsececsecsecsecsecsecsessecaesaeeaeeas 11 62 gt Online Helpand Tool Ipu l l Sk aaa Sk tint Sk aka SS aq S ha asss 12 63 Time BstIOmaleS usss pasapanakakaaakaqakakaqaqakasakaqakakakakakanakaqaqaqakakanuas 12 64 Maximum BE ee RE 12 6 5 TProuublesh e ti ery yy a EEEE E EEEO AREE EEEE EEEE ENE AS 13 T SpE MenUS Z eras abe ane sasa T sat EE atus S 13 IA Bal Mei EE 13 7 1 1 Open AORs and Targets Ctrl O sa ssasasassassussannhaashauaaaqanhaqaaqqakiasanaquanaqas 13 TAQ Save AORS and Targets etrES u cease Se an tees eee u ssh AR dier deeds 14 7 1 3 Import Fixed Single Target List Ten 16 7 1 4 Import Moving Single Target List shift ctrl I a 17 7 1 5 Save Target Background Estimates csscsscssessessersessessesserssesensensenssnsensensenssnsensensensensensensens 17 7 1 6 Save Target Visibility Windows n n nsn 17 7 1 7 Save Current Plotted Image as FITS file Ten 17 7 1 8 Save Current Plotted Image amp Overlays to JPEG GIF BMP PNG ctrl J 17 TAD View Program Ctrl K wccccccccccccocscecetecscocacecececscosacten cece cosacecsctea cosectencdctcbsactevcactc
196. ions Biz 25 micron m31 Bon ISSA 25 micron m31 Total Duration hrs 6 1 Figure 147 Using the Crop utility a cropped copy of the original image is created after selecting the image section to be cropped see Figure 146 Target m31 Type Fixed Single June 18 2008 141 Spot User s Guide v18 AAA Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z Z LE Le oa esgee Alle Es gg x s z EA FETE R Flux 4 062 MJY SR Eq J2000 RA 0h42m56 69s X 99 000 fi ry 1 Pixel 90 000 Eq J2000 Dec 41d18m39 7s Y 102 000 3 Lefi Mouse Button Click and drag to select area Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Ma Mouse Control kas ae i a Mouse Flux Statistics Tool i AUN i 55 5 5 eo t ISSA 25 micron m31 l h O CG gt A Statistic esta kd e Ki El Observations Ba ssa 25 micron m31 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 6 1 Figure 148 Once the Area Statistics utility under the Overlays menu also the Area Statistics icon in the image manipulation and overlays tool bar along the left side has been selected drag the cursor across the image while holding the left mouse button as shown in the figure This will result in an aperture being drawn on the image Releasing the mouse button will open the results dialog shown in Figure 149 A red X appears on the image when on
197. ired wavelength If no date is entered Spot returns a minimum and maximum estimate of the background for the range of dates the targets are visible If a date is entered Spot calculates estimates for that date and time All of the lines starting with the pound sign are treated as comments Proper motion for RA and DEC are currently ignored for background computations This deficiency may be repaired in the future For compatibility with the Target Fixed Single target list the same restrictions apply to proper motion even though they are not used in the computation If the proper motion values are present they must be supplied in pairs RA and DEC Ifthe value for the sixth column is larger than 1900 0 it is interpreted as the epoch The epoch field should only be entered for B1950 coordinates COORD SYSTEM Equatorial Equatorial Galactic or Ecliptic EQUINOX B1950 B1950 J2000 or blank for Galactic Date Wavelength Name RA LON DEC LAT PM RA PM DEC EPOCH 2008 nov 2 70 NGC 001 12h34m23 45s 34d23m56 2s 2 3 3 4 1950 3 2008 nov 4 70 NGC3334 23 56h 34 456d 2 3 3 4 2008 nov 5 70 NGC3335 23 56h 34 456d 1950 3 2008 nov 6 70 NGC3336 23 56h 34 456d 2009 jan 9 24 NGC3342 Oh Od 2009 jan 9 70 NGC3340 Oh Od 2009 jan 10 70 NGC3343 Oh Od COORD SYSTEM Ecliptic Equatorial Galactic or Ecliptic EQUINOX B1950 B1950 J2000 or blank for Galactic Dat
198. is the single identifier Spitzer uses to provide ephemeris information for planning and scheduling 10 1 5 Moving Cluster A moving cluster is a group of co moving Solar System targets separated by less than 1 to be observed with the same AOT parameters The positions are entered as a primary target and offsets east and north or row and column array from that position The ephemeris for the primary target determines the tracking rate to be used for the entire cluster but the primary target itself does not have to be observed as part of the cluster This is accomplished by selecting the Observe Offsets Only checkbox See Figure 59 10 2 Inertial Target Coordinate Systems 10 2 1 Coordinate Entry Formats Spot allows the entry of coordinates in five different systems for inertial targets in the fixed single and fixed cluster position target types If not input in equinox J2000 the coordinates will be translated internally from the input system to the J2000 system for executing the observation All proper motions must have the same epoch as the target coordinates A fixed cluster positions dialog is displayed in Figure 56 with the menu showing the five coordinate systems that Spot can accept as input These are Equatorial J2000 Enter the RA Dec and proper motions if applicable The epoch field is not used The epoch of 2000 0 is the Julian date 2451545 0 Equatorial B1950 Enter the RA Dec proper motions if applicable
199. ixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Tar Target List Instrument Settings Band O Scale Mod Field Siz Exp Time se Sky Offset of Cycle _Raster Mat 24 um M Small 81 pe 1 Set Map 70um Default small F 10 en 1 Set Map 160um M pam Sman 21 10 4 Set Map Default Flux Density Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Help Cancel OK Figure 98 The MIPS Photometry Super Resolution AOT Raster maps can only be used if the small field size is selected The 70 um array has a scale option for default or fine super resolution observations In addition you can select a sky offset when using the large field size option with the 24 um array 11 7 1 Raster Map Rows vs Columns A row ina MIPS PH SR raster map is parallel to the MIPS cross scan direction A column is parallel to the MIPS in scan direction See Figure 66 for an illustration of the Spitzer focal plane projected onto the sky In that figure a row runs horizontally and a column runs vertically These are the same row column definitions as in IRAC mapping Figure 99 illustrates the relationship of MIPS raster map rows and columns 1 row x3 columns 3 rows x 1 column l Figure 99 The relationship between rows and columns in the MIPS Photometry Super Resolution AOT raster mapping mode is illustrated June
200. l Long High 1st order 2nd Reset gef IRAC FOV 4 5 8 0 um IRS Slit Short Low IRS Peak up Blue Red IRAC 3 6 5 8 um MIPS 24 um Instantaneous IRS Slit FOV Short High MIPS 24 um Nominal Focal Surface PCRS MIPS 160um Full FOV Radius 16 arcminutes Instantaneous FOV MIPS 160 um Full FOV Note This is not an engineering diagram Figure 66 The Spitzer field of view locations projected onto the sky The Spitzer to Sun vector points to the right in this figure The position angle that Spot returns is the degrees east of north of this axis projected onto the sky If north is up in this figure the position angle returned is 270 The IRS Short Low module includes the 5 2 8 7 um and 7 4 14 0 um slits and the IRS Long Low module includes the 14 0 21 3 um and 19 5 38 0 um slits If equatorial north is up and east is to the left in Figure 66 the position angle is 270 You may enter the position angle that Spot returns into the focal plane overlay section 7 7 12 and display the Spitzer focal plane properly rotated on a sky image If north is up and the PA Spot returns is zero then Figure 66 would rotate 90 counterclockwise June 18 2008 78 Spot User s Guide v18 The position angle for the IRS slits is calculated with respect to the W axis for each slit where W is one direction of a coordinate system defined individually for each module In the above diagram the W axis for the long low slit points to the right
201. l or a selection of the AORs loaded in Spot Figure 50 The information provided is Target The name and type of the currently selected target are shown at the bottom left of the main screen Total Duration The total amount of time in decimal hours for the AORs that have time estimates and are currently loaded or selected as ON see section 7 8 2 is shown in this field in the lower right corner If you click on this field the format toggles between decimal hours and hours minutes seconds Proposal This will show the proposal program number of your approved observing program or the name of the AOR file you have read into Spot from disk Disk Icon If you have entered AORs into Spot that have not yet been saved to a file the diskette icon will appear in the bottom bar of the main window You may save your AORs by clicking this icon clicking the disk icon in the upper icon bar or selecting Save AORs and Targets from the file menu Net Icon The Net Up or Net Down words and symbols give you the current status of your connection to the servers at the SSC if you are connected via the Internet If the network is down or you are working offline you can still enter target and AOT information into Spot and display images or catalogs you have cached or have locally on disk You cannot obtain time estimates background estimates visibility windows orientation information or load new images or catalogs from the s
202. lbar click Submit and choose Submit Proposal to SSC If the proposal is not an Archive or Theory proposal Spot will ask you if the AORs you have loaded into Spot are the ones you want to submit with your proposal Figure 134 Clicking No will cancel the submission process You can then go back to the AOR window in Spot and load in the appropriate AORs before submitting your proposal again Spot will then ask you to save the coversheet file as shown in Figure 135 Choose an appropriate file name and save it If you attempt to cancel the save Spot will go back one step The coversheet file name will be necessary if you wish to update the proposal before the deadline Otherwise Spot will assume you are submitting an entirely new proposal instead of updating an existing one Next Spot will bring up the Proposal Submit dialog window as in Figure 136 Fill in a nifty proposal user name and password Jot these down somewhere or otherwise retain to memory since you will need these to resubmit your proposal we urge proposers not to use potentially June 18 2008 131 Spot User s Guide v18 embarrassing or profane usernames and passwords Click OK and Spot will submit your proposal to the SSC Proposal User Name soifer_m31 Password at least 8 characters TT Confirm Password GEES Submitter s E mail help spiter caltech edu Proposal User Hame is a short nickname for your pro
203. line form at https cat ipac caltech edu DDT application html and should not be submitted using the Proposal Submission Tool in Spot However you will still want to construct the AORs for your DDT proposal using Spot The AOR file is submitted along with the proposal using the online form See http ssc spitzer caltech edu geninfo ddt for details June 18 2008 135 Spot User s Guide v18 15 Fixed Target and AOR Visualization In this section we describe the Spot capabilities for visualizing the sky at inertial target positions section 7 6 Moving target visualization is discussed in section 16 Overlaying the area coverage of an AOR is discussed in section 7 7 14 Descriptions of the Images and Overlays menu functions are discussed in sections 7 6 and 7 7 In this section we walk through examples using Spot s visualization capabilities in planning your AOR eoe _ Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool u 5 A493 DB elm eje ou es Wl rd aj se Motus Control p a e isa en Seco S Shift Left Button Center the Image at point a Mouse _Any O Q Rssa 25 micron m31 I m GH u e Base Image eise E ON l Observations i 2MASS k m31 L S A J Target m31 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 6 1 Figure 141 The Spot screen after downloading ISSA 25 um and
204. lined above for 2MASS Catalog peak up or PCRS Catalog peak up stars Target Name optional SIMBAD w Resolve the Name HD 220152 peak up starl Visibility Orientation Background Fixed Single S Coord Sys Equatorial J2000 z pipes ition RA 23h21m31 77s el Use Proper Motion Dec 4d37m44 95 PM RA wt 0 069 Epoch 1998 73 PM Dec ar 0 041 Bright Moving Objects to Avoid vi Earth Moon Others OK Cancel Figure 88 The View Modify Peak Up Target dialog In this example we are editing in proper motion information for the 2MASS peak up star for our moving target IRS peak up example in Figure 87 Note that you can change any of the peak up target information such as adding proper motion by clicking on the View Modify Peak up Target button and modifying entries in the dialog shown in Figure 88 To replace the dummy fixed target for the actual moving target click the Target List button near the top of the AOT window Select your moving target from the list of targets in the dialog cf Figure 63 your moving target should now June 18 2008 98 Spot User s Guide v18 be the target in the AOT window The peak up on the fixed 2MASS star will now apply to the IRS observation of your moving target rather than the dummy target 11 3 IRS Spectral Mapping The parameters for IRS Spectral Mapping Figure 89 let you select the number of positions in the direction parallel to the slit rows and the number of
205. m image of the Ring Nebula Details of the AOR are given below The MIPS 160 um enhanced photometry mode was selected in this example 15 7 7 MIPS PH SR AOR The example MIPS Photometry Super Resolution AOR uses all three arrays of the MIPS instrument The AOR is shown at the end of this section We again use an M31 image simply to illustrate the overlay After selecting the AOR and displaying the image s we select Current AOR from the Overlays menu and enter an acceptable visibility date The area coverage for the MIPS AOR is now displayed in Figure 166 The 24 um overlay appears in cyan outline the 70 um in pink and the 160 um overlay in green Clicking on the cross hairs icon within the MIPSP Ring layer brings up the small MIPSP Ring Parts dialog window from which the different arrays can be turned on or off by clicking the corresponding check box Details of the MIPS PH SR AOR shown in Figure 166 AOT TYPE MIPS Photometry AOR LABEL MIPSP Ring AOR STATUS new MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME M31 COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 0h42m44 32s DEC _LAT 41d16m08 5s OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES June 18 2008 157 Spot User s Guide v18 MICRON 24 FIELD SIZE SMALL EXPOSURE TIME 3 N CYCLES 1 MICRON
206. ming in or out on the plot as well as saving a slice to local disk A slice from each overlaid image in Figure 154 is shown 15 7 1 Features of AOTs when Overlaying an AOR There are features of the detector arrays apertures or distortions that may appear when you visualize AORs Here is a brief summary by instrument 15 7 1 1 Features in IRAC Visualizations The boxes depicted in each overlay are an average of each field of view for the IRAC instrument Because there are two detectors per field of view there are slight offsets for each detector relative to the average field of view See the Spitzer Observer s Manual for details on the true positions of each detector Observers should use these visualizations with care The crescents and rhomboids are X filled boxes displayed beside each aperture Scattered light will fall onto the detector if a bright source happens to fall within these June 18 2008 148 Spot User s Guide v18 tiny regions If you are planning to observe a target that has a nearby bright object you will want to try to avoid an observation date that places the bright object in these small regions See the IRAC chapter in the Spitzer Observer s Manual for more details 15 7 1 2 Features in IRS Visualizations The IRS peak up observations the IRS peak up array aperture are included in the overlay if peak up is selected in the AOR Once the peak up is performed the peak up arrays continue to appear in
207. must start with a slash 5 If desired add this directory to your PATH setenv PATH path scr user my_ pride 6 Type the name of the program spot or leopard to launch it 5 3 Mac Installation Click on the link for the software package offered as a disk image dmg file Drag the Spitzer pride folder icon from the pop up window onto your local disk into whichever directory you want to install the software For instance you may wish this to be the Applications folder Double click on the program to install it Click on the Spot executable to start Spot 5 4 Spot Automatic Update The automatic update feature from the Options menu will allow the client side of Spot to update itself if it detects that a newer version is available at the SSC Spot will access the updated files at the SSC via the Internet and will automatically install them on your computer Auto update is the default setting when you first install Spitzer Pride If you turn this feature off or decline an auto update at any time Spot will remember that you June 18 2008 10 Spot User s Guide v18 have turned it off We strongly encourage users to leave auto update turned on and to accept auto updates when they occur Note to allow auto update under Windows Vista use the right mouse button when clicking on the Spot icon and select Run as Administrator You can click on the icon and run Spot normally thereafter 6 General Information 6 1 Client Server Sof
208. n Spikes Once you have the Spitzer focal plane displayed on your image clicking the rightmost small icon under the Spitzer layer the diffraction spike show hide icon EI will display the Spitzer diffraction spikes for the position angle entered in the Spitzer layer box Figure 178 Again like the focal plane itself these diffraction spikes can be repositioned by clicking the left mouse button on the desired center They can be rotationally repositioned only by entering a new position angle 16 4 Displaying Moving Target AORs Once you have entered a moving target AOR you can display this AOR on your image for a given date The AOR display is derived from the same command sequence logic June 18 2008 171 Spot User s Guide v18 that will be sent to the spacecraft Consequently for moving targets the AOR display shows not only the spacecraft pointing and mapping motions but also the combined effect of the moving target s track on those pointings What this means is that for a rapidly moving object you may be able to see the actual elongation of a mapping pattern in the direction of the object s motion Spot does not yet explicitly support visualization of a moving target AOR in the object s rest frame However this can be mimicked to a limited extent by entering a dummy fixed target that corresponds to the object s position at the observing time desired However for a rapidly moving object typically comets near perihelion or near E
209. n decimal degrees The value should be between 0 and 1 0 05 Cancel ox 3 Figure 19 When searching for NVO images near your target position first specify the size of the region of interest over which Spot can search 7 6 8 NVO Image Spot will now retrieve images from repositories registered with the National Virtual Observatory NVO The images are queried and retrieved via Simple Image Access Protocol SIAP defined in http www ivoa net Documents WD SIA sia 20040524 html June 18 2008 29 Spot User s Guide v18 ee VO Image Resources Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Target Target List Select Resources Spectral Coverage DEE Optical Matching Resources Infrared Fy Radio S Ultraviolet MES Tgt Name Other F MAST Scrapboo 0h42m38 97s 41d15m29 2s 0 MAST Scrapboo 0h42m40 85s 41d15m51 2s MAST Scrapboo 0h42m40 85s 41d15m51 2s MAST Scrapboo 0h42m41 49s 41d17m05 2s MAST Scrapboo 0h42m41 62s 41d15m18 4s 4 MAST Scrapboo 0h42m41 74s 41d15m57 9s 7 e gt a Initial Zoom Level No Zoom Where r Three Color Plots Put plot in new Frame _ Make this a 3 Color Plot Put plot in current Frame Color Band Red e Help Cancel OK Figure 20 The available options for spectral coverage when searching for NVO images near your target position You enter the initial zoom level You can also create three c
210. n headers and data in columns 7 7 1 5 Keywords Keywords start with a back slash There should be no space between the back slash and the keyword For example ORIGIN IPAC Infrared Science Archive IRSA Caltech JPL fixlen F RowsRetrieved 215 The required keyword is RowsRetrieved which tells how many lines of data are in the file The keywords are placed first in the file and they must be followed by column header lines 7 7 1 6 Column Headers The column headers describe the name data type and units of the tabular data namel name2 data type double unit degrees nulll null2 The three required columns are name ra dec char double double degrees degrees null null null All four column header lines are required Every column owns the rightmost bar except for the first that owns two bars 7 7 1 7 Sample IPAC Table File RowsRetrieved 10 fscname ra dec fnu_12 fnu_25 fnu_ 60 fnu_ 100 char double double double double double double degrees degrees Jy Jy Jy Jy null null null null null null null F23545 2632 359 2639 26 8250 0 221 0 112 0 126 1 100 F23548 2633 359 3554 26 8394 0 173 0 103 0 554 e219 F23567 2659 359 8219 27 2697 1 298 0 315 Or 1 52 0 838 F23568 2554 359 8425 26 1917 0 070 0 111 0 303 0 848 F23574 2800 359 9940 28 2814 OTE 0 054 0 228 0 951 F23561 2901 359 6731 29 3036 0
211. n in Figure 78 The Post Cryo Subarray AOT is shown in Figure 79 Observers will be able to select in which of the two channels data should be collected Note the currently available frame time selections are different compared to the cryogenic mission IRAC AOT The actual frame times that will be available during the Warm Mission will depend on their in orbit performance Stellar mode will no longer be necessary so it is no longer supported This is the AOT to use for Cycle 6 proposals 11 2 IRS Staring Mode For details about the IRS Staring mode you should consult the Spitzer Observer s Manual When calculating how much time you are spending on source remember that IRS takes exposures at two positions along the slit as part of the standard data taking You are spending twice as much time on source as the ramp duration you select There are June 18 2008 89 Spot User s Guide v18 two modes available for use in the IRS Staring AOT the standard staring mode with or without peak up and peak up only mode eoe IRAC Post Cryo Mapping Unique AOR Label IRACPC 0000 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Tar _ Target List Instrument Settings Readout Mode For each Pointing Field of View Data Collection m 3 6um V 3 6um Number of Frames 1 times 64 frames Mi 4 5um Mi 4 5um Full Array High Dynamic Range fei Subarray Frame Time secs
212. nd Estimates item in the File Menu The file however cannot be read back into Spot The units for the estimates are MJy sr 10 9 4 Compute Backgrounds from File It is possible to compute background estimates for a list of objects using the Compute Backgrounds from File option in the Tools menu This function will then prompt you for an output file and then writes out the list of sky background estimates based on input read from a list The input file format is the same as for a Target Fixed Single target list see section 7 1 3 with two additional columns at the start of each line date and wavelength There are two sample files specified below The first two keywords specify the coordinate system and equinox for all of the positions in the list The list columns are separated by spaces If there are spaces in the values for a column such as for the date field double quotes are needed surrounding the value Note the format for specifying the June 18 2008 80 Spot User s Guide v18 date day month year You will need a separate line of input for each wavelength of interest for each source Calculate Background Estimates For All Targets Wavelength microns 24 00 Date preference e Calculate Range When Visible Calculate for Specific Date Universal Time Date Time Do Estimate Figure 69 The Calculate Background for All Targets dialog from the Targets pull down menu The user enters the des
213. nerally these are objects that you should avoid when planning your observations since they will likely negatively impact the quality of your observations and possibly those to follow yours in the observing schedule For IRAC AORs this utility searches for bright objects within a radius 10 of the aperture center For IRS AORs this utility searches more tightly to the area covered by the AOR depending on the module currently excluding Peak up Imaging For MIPS AORs it searches for bright objects within very nearly the exact area covered by a PH SR SED Total Power or Scan observation June 18 2008 44 Spot User s Guide v18 An example is shown in Figure 41 where bright sources near a 5x5 IRAC map have been overlaid on a MSX image of NGC 2024 A detailed listing of these sources including object name position and brightness can then be obtained as shown in Figure 42 The bright object data can then be saved to a file on local disk by pressing the Save Table button and entering in the resulting dialog a file name and local disk directory Bright moving objects can be avoided following the steps described in section 10 5 Ce Bright Object Data Controls Hide All Show All Names X Color Make Targi Save Table On Hi Shape Tgt Name N RA Dec dist M O x I 05404553 01 C Sh40m45 53s 1d56m33 6s 0 076 2 M in Joro 5h41m38 66s 1d51m19 4s 0 014 St WM x 05396 0156 5h42m10 39s 1d55m12
214. new Frame S e Iris 12 microns Put all plots in current Frame i Iris 25 microns Iris 60 microns J Iris 100 microns Size Degrees B 5 000 Initial Zoom Level No Zoom B Three Color Plots Make this a 3 Color Plot Color Band Help Cancel OK Figure 12 The ISSA IRIS dialog that allows selection of IRAS images for display in Spot You may select 12 25 60 and or 100 um images Three choices for how the images are displayed are available from the Where box You enter the size 1 12 5 on a side and the initial zoom level You can also create three color RGB image composites 7 6 Images Menu Images from a variety of different wavelengths of your target region can be downloaded and displayed within Spot Catalog coordinate grid Spitzer focal plane target position June 18 2008 24 Spot User s Guide v18 and AOR area coverage overlays are available from the Overlays Menu The visualization functionality is discussed in section 15 Spot reads and writes FITS format files The images available in this Spot release are 7 6 1 ISSA and IRIS IRAS Sky Survey Atlas The ISSA images are IRAS Sky Survey Atlas maps at 12 25 60 and 100 um that will help you characterize the sky at mid infrared wavelengths Note however that these images have had zodiacal light contributions removed A newer generation of IRAS images called IRIS benefits from better zodiacal light subtraction calibrat
215. ng AOR_LABEL TRAC 0000 June 18 2008 150 Spot User s Guide v18 AOR_STATUS New MOVING TARGET NO TARGET TYPE FIXED SINGLE TARGET NAME m31 COORD SYSTEM Equatorial J2000 POSITION RA LON 0h42m44 32s DEC _LAT 41d16m08 5s OBJECT AVOIDANCE EARTH YES OTHERS YES READOUT MODE FULL ARRAY ARRAY 3 6 5 8u YES 4 5 8 0u Y HI DYNAMIC NO FRAME TIME 12 0 DITHER PATTERN TYPE none N FRAMES PER POINTING 1 MAP TYPE RECTANGULAR ROWS 5 COLS 5 ROW STEP 260 0 COL _STEP 260 0 ORIENT ARRAY ROW _OFFSET 0 0 COL OFFSET 0 0 N CYCLE 1 Gl Wei Pointings Table IRAC 0000 Roll Angle 54 33 Controls Hide All Animation Animation w Trail Save Field Of View RA Dec Detail IRAC_FOV_bwn_3 685 8_and_4 5 10 6617 41 1686 IRAC_FOV_bwn_3 685 8_and_4 5 10 6617 41 1686 IRAC_FOV_bwn_3 685 8_and_4 5 10 6062 41 2275 IRAC_FOV_bwn_3 68 amp 5 8_and_4 5 10 5506 41 2864 IRAC_FOV_bwn_3 6 amp 5 8_and_4 5 10 6291 41 3282 IRAC_FOV_bwn_3 685 8_and_4 5 10 6846 41 2693 IRAC_FOV_bwn_3 6 amp 5 8_and_4 5 10 7401 41 2103 3 685 8_and_4 5 10 8185 41 2520 IRAC_FOV_bwn IRAC_FOV_bwn_3 6 amp 5 8_and_4 5 10 7631 41 3110 IRAC_FOV_bwn_3 685 8 and 4 5 10 7076 41 3699 Angle 54 33 Date 2006 Aug 23 00 00 GMT KSE Save Pointing To file File Name m3
216. ng Observations Tool Z A Seele ASD we S te ota es EB aa Wille e Flux 2 925E 6 W mA2 sr Eq J2000 RA 0h42m43 20s X 303 500 1 Pixel 6 000 Eq J2000 Dec 41d15mS6 6s Y 300 500 R M Mouse Control e Shifi Left Button Center the Image at point LS z Mouse Any zs a sees o eoo MSX A m31 G a E m BJ DoC IRS Blue Peaku x alia e DoC 8 000 E Base Image e be sc Target m31 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 4 3 Figure 44 Depth of coverage map for a 24 um observation of the center of M31 The depth of the map or number of frames is shown in the small box in the DoC layer as you move your mouse over the image This example has the opacity icon of the M31 IRAS image turned down so that the depth of coverage map is clearly visible Click the color table control icon to change color table June 18 2008 46 Spot User s Guide v18 7 8 Options Menu 7 8 1 User Automatic Spot Version Update The default for this is Yes When enabled if an update for Spot is available you will be asked if you would like to update your software approximately 2 minutes after you start Spot with an Internet connection If selected Spot will download the update and install it on your computer The update will take effect the next time you start up Spot exit Spot and start it again if you wish to access the update immediately or Spot is automatically restarted It is r
217. nipulate the order of the AORs by selecting one and using the Perform Action buttons to Remove the AOR or move it up or down in the order Apply Cancel Help June 18 2008 116 Spot User s Guide v18 ee AOR Timing Timing Windows UT AOR Name IRS phase 1 Start date Start time End date End time 2008 Jan 16 03 00 00 2008 Jan 16 11 00 00 E 2008 Jan 26 15 00 00 2008 Jan 26 23 00 00 2008 Feb 6 03 00 00 2008 Feb 6 11 00 00 a gt i Visibility Windows Window Open Window Close Duration days 2003 Auq 26 00 05 00 2003 Auq 28 06 52 00 23 2003 Dec 17 07 07 00 2004 Jan 31 09 45 00 45 1 2004 Jul 15 17 12 00 2004 Aug 31 20 50 00 47 2 2004 Dec 22 05 06 00 2005 Feb 05 18 08 00 45 5 2005 Jul 23 00 41 00 2005 Sep 08 06 42 00 47 3 2005 Dec 29 19 27 00 2006 Feb 13 10 07 00 45 6 2006 Jul 30 20 55 00 2006 Sep 16 03 45 00 47 3 2007 Jan 06 18 08 00 2007 Feb 21 09 21 00 45 6 2007 Aug 07 21 52 00 2007 Sep 24 05 00 00 47 3 2008 Jan 14 20 01 00 2008 Feb 29 11 30 00 45 6 2008 Aug 15 00 55 00 2008 Oct 01 08 11 00 47 3 2009 Jan 21 23 40 00 2009 Mar 08 15 18 00 45 7 2009 Aug 23 04 57 00 2009 Sep 29 23 38 00 37 8 Help Cancel OK Figure 110 Three timing windows that provide an 8 hour window every 10 5 days to observe a particular phase of a hypothetical periodic object 13 3 5 Creating a Follow on Constraint Follow on constraints are used when the execution of one AOR needs to trigger the execution of a second AOR at a particular time or with a
218. nter Proposal Title Proposal Type GO A Target Of Opportunity Hours in decimal Requested 0 1 5 _ Thesis Proprietary Period days 365 Complete Proposal Information Add Principal Investigator Clear lt No Principal Investigator gt Add Contact Clear lt No Contact gt Optional Add Co Investigators Clear lt No Co Investigators gt Add Proposal Abstract Clear lt No Abstract gt Add Proposal PDF File lt 10MB limit Clear lt No Proposal PDF File gt Add Science Category Information Clear lt No Science Category Information gt Optional Add any Extra Text Clear lt No Optional Extra Text gt Optional Add Joint Observatories Clear lt No Optional Joint Observatories gt File Name lt None gt Proposai User Name lt New Proposal gt Figure 116 Proposal Submission Tool Main Window In this main window you can 1 Enter the full proposal title June 18 2008 121 Spot User s Guide v18 2 Select the proposal type Figure 117 Select the hours of observatory time requested 4 Set the proprietary period for the data resulting from the proposed General Observer GO observations the value must be between 0 and 365 days see the current Call for Proposals for details on proprietary period Indicate if the proposal contains targets of opportunity 6 Indicate if the proposal will be part of a thesis project
219. nting Zone It defines where Spitzer can safely point and execute observations When you select this overlay Spot will bring up a dialog window and ask you to select an observation date a default date is provided Spot will connect to the servers at the SSC to determine where the OPZ crosses your displayed image If the OPZ does not cross the image Spot will ask if you would like to display an All Sky image to see how far away your displayed image is from the OPZ Spot will then show you the OPZ on the All Sky image Figure 40 eee Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Select 385 Allee w w Zx Mouse Control Left Mouse Button Select a point on the Image Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Bright B eoe R MSX A ngc 2024 Wd Me LEE o o E Observations Elusx A ng 2024 Target ngc 2024 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 0 6 Figure 41 An overlay of bright objects near a 5x5 IRAC map is shown on a MSX 8 um image of NGC 2024 7 7 17 Spitzer Bright Objects for AOR Spitzer observations can be compromised by the presence of a bright object in or near your target field Spot enables you to obtain from the SSC database an overlay of the known bright inertial objects that may be within or near the field covered by an AOR Detailed information and a very similar set of bright object lists can be found at http ssc spitzer caltech edu documents brightobj Ge
220. o use by clicking the appropriate button 7 5 7 Recompute All Estimates shift ctrl A This function recomputes the observing time estimates for the current AOR the AORs with the ON flag set or all the AORs loaded into Spot The user selects the appropriate set to use from a button on the dialog shown in Figure 11 As Spot recomputes the estimates they are updated in the main AOR table June 18 2008 23 Spot User s Guide v18 The Recompute All function runs in the background You can continue to work with other Spot functions while it is running 7 5 8 Compute Backgrounds from File The Compute Backgrounds from File tool allows the user to read in a list of targets and calculate the background levels of the targets at a given wavelength on a specified date The file format for this list is discussed in detail in Section 10 9 3 7 5 9 Memory Monitor This dialog shows how much memory bytes JAVA has allocated total memory and how much of that allocation is currently available free memory We are using this mainly as a debugging tool to determine when JAVA is having trouble with the memory allocation mainly on Sun Workstations ee ISSA IRIS Image Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s New Target Modify Target Target List Plot Types Issa 12 microns Where V Issa 25 microns _ Issa 60 microns fei Panel plots 1 per Frame gt Issa 100 microns Put all plots in
221. observatory within Horizons using the telnet and e mail interfaces Spitzer is NOT available as an observatory using the Horizons web interface Horizons will return Spitzer centered target positions and geometric information such as maximum elongation of satellites from their parent planets An illustrative step by step example showing how to use Horizons to generate Spitzer centric information can be found on the Proposal Kit web page Please consult the JPL Horizons User s Manual June 18 2008 76 Spot User s Guide v18 http ssd jpl nasa gov horizons_doc for more detailed information on Horizons capabilities and instructions for use Chat Visibility Windows Spitzer visibility windows for target Encke Window Open Window Close Duration days 2003 Aug 26 00 05 00 2003 Sep 08 02 03 00 SH 2003 Nov 07 19 33 00 2003 Nov 17 08 06 00 9 5 2004 May 24 01 48 00 2004 Jun 30 13 13 00 37 5 2004 Oct 06 16 23 00 2004 Nov 16 15 53 00 41 0 2005 Jun 25 15 23 00 2005 Jul 25 16 38 00 30 1 2005 Nov 07 23 50 00 2005 Dec 16 20 54 00 38 9 2006 Jul 24 19 23 00 2006 Auq 31 16 46 00 37 9 2006 Dec 03 17 02 00 2007 Jan 08 16 30 00 36 0 2007 Jun 20 02 07 00 2007 Jul 20 02 06 00 30 0 2007 Oct 15 13 18 00 2007 Nov 28 18 16 00 44 2 2008 Jul 05 11 23 00 2008 Auq 13 12 31 00 39 0 2008 Nov 26 19 20 00 2009 Jan 04 22 26 00 39 1 AANA Aun NI 1A 20 AN anna Can 12 DEEN ane Visibility windows shortened to avoid earth moon Position Angle Shadow VIS Compu
222. odify Target Open a target entry dialog with the current target entered 7 3 4 Target List ctrl L This opens a dialog showing a summary list of the targets currently loaded Clicking on an entry makes this target the current target The name will appear at the bottom of the main Spot window In addition from this dialog window you can show the background estimates and visibility windows for the list of targets You can save them to disk by selecting the appropriate option under the File menu As you enter targets into Spot the target list appears at the bottom of the Targets pull down menu By selecting any of the targets shown in the menu you move that target to the top of the list 7 3 5 Calculate Visibility Windows for All Targets See section 10 7 1 June 18 2008 21 Spot User s Guide v18 7 3 6 Calculate Background for All Targets See section 10 9 3 A VERY IMPORTANT NOTE The targets in the Target List and the AORs are not linked If you change the coordinates in a target that you have already entered into an AOR they are NOT updated in that AOR unless you modify the target from within the AOT dialog To change the coordinates for a target already included in an AOR load the AOR file into Spot double click on the AOR to open it up and then select the Modify Target button within the AOR to correct modify the coordinates 7 4 Observation Menu The selection of the desired AOT parameters is made from the Observati
223. of the Array FOV IRAC_ Center of 5 8umSub array Center of array FOV IRAC_Center_ of 4 5 amp 8 QumArray Center of IRAC_ Center of 4 5umArray Center of the Array FOV IRAC_ Center of 4 5umSub Array Center of array FOV IRAC_Center_of 8 QOumArray Center of the Array FOV IRAC_Center_ of 8 QOumSub Array Center of array FOV Center Position the full 3 6 amp 5 8 um FOV full 256 x 256 pixel 3 6 um the 32x32 pixel 3 6 um Sub full 256 x 256 pixel 5 8 um the 32x32 pixel 5 8 um Sub the full 4 5 amp 8 0 um FOV full 256 x 256 pixel 4 5 um the 32x32 pixel 4 5 um Sub full 256 x 256 pixel 8 0 um the 32x32 pixel 8 0 um Sub IRAC_FOV_bwn_3 6 amp 5 8 and 4 5 amp 8 0 for mapping Position between the 3 6 5 8 and 4 5 8 0 um FOVs for mapping MIPS 160um_center amp large FOVs full array also used for 160um large field photometry observations MIPS_160um_large only 160um for PH SR large sam visualization as center us MIPS_160um_ plusY_edge Position on the y tv edge of the FOV on the z w 0 median line MIPS 160um_small_ FOV1 Position Offset Y 0 Z 3 pixels MIPS 160um_small_ FOV2 Position Offset Y 0 5 Z 3 5 pixels MIPS 24um_ center Center of the MIPS 24um plusY_edge Position on the y median line June 18 2008 full 24 um array FOV edge of the FOV on the z 0 both FOVs selected Center of the full 160 um array FOV 162 Spot User s Guide v18
224. olor RGB image composites When you first select this option a dialog as shown in Figure 19 opens in which you can enter the size of the region of interest around your target in decimal degrees You can then narrow the NVO query by spectral coverage as shown in Figure 20 the default is Multi for multiwavelength coverage You can further narrow the search to available matching resources for the chosen spectral coverage as shown in Figure 21 Then click OK Each SIAP site is queried individually one by one The list of matching resources grows as sites are queried The image search can take several minutes to complete The search is performed in the background and does not prevent you from performing other operations 7 6 9 FITS File Spot can display any images that have been obtained from another image server or that you have taken yourself Spot also reads gzipped FITS files and FITS files with extensions There must be world coordinate system keywords in the header for the positional information to be accurately read Data from most modern telescopes should be handled well Note that the available computer system memory limits the size of a FITS image that may be loaded into Spot Loading large FITS images may compromise the memory left available for other Spot functions The images selection dialog is shown in Figure 22 June 18 2008 30 e098 Spot User s Guide v18 VO Image Resources Target m31 Type Fixed
225. om IPAC Spot currently serves six catalogs from IPAC servers whose sources can be overlaid onto the image display From the dialog Figure 26 you select the catalog and appropriate search radius for sources These catalogs are served from IRSA like the ISSA and 2MASS images and NED The text catalogs are cached like the images to your designated cache directory see section 7 8 7 7 7 1 2 Catalogs from HEASARC Spot currently serves a large number and range of catalogs from HEASARC whose sources can be overlaid onto the image display From the dialog Figure 27 you select the catalog and appropriate search radius for sources The text catalogs are cached like the images to your designated cache directory see section 7 8 7 7 7 1 3 Catalogs from VizieR beta As a new feature Spot now serves a large number and range of catalogs from VizieR whose sources can be overlaid onto the image display From the dialog Figure 28 you select the catalog and appropriate search radius for sources The text catalogs are cached June 18 2008 33 Spot User s Guide v18 like the images to your designated cache directory see section 7 8 7 This catalog access is in a beta version you should limit the size of your search radius less than 100 unless the data content is small and only works with target names that are Simbad resolvable Catalog Overlay Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31000s 41d16m09 4000s New Ta
226. on Your choices will be shown on the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window as shown in Figure 131 Done Change Proposal PDF File Clear Jhome user spot proposal padf Done Modify Science Category Information Clear extragalactic stellar studies Optional Add any Extra Text Clear lt No Optional Extra Text gt Figure 131 Part of the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window showing that the Science Categories chosen now appear 14 8 Add any Extra Text This field is useful for communicating any additional information to the SSC as needed See the relevant Call for Proposals to determine if you need to enter any information in this field Otherwise leave the Extra Text field blank 14 9 Add Joint Observatories This field Figure 132 is to indicate whether your Spitzer proposal includes a segment of the observing program in cooperation with the other Great Observatories the Hubble Space Telescope HST and Chandra X ray Observatory CXO the National Optical Astronomy Observatories NOAO including Gemini and or the National Radio Astronomy Observatory NRAO See the current Call for Proposals for policies regarding joint programs with other observatories Clicking on this button will bring up a dialog box in which you can enter one or more of the listed observatories if relevant Figure 133 Otherwise leave the Add Joint Observatories field blank Done Modify Science Category Information Clear extragalactic stellar studie
227. on menu The Spitzer Observer s Manual is your primary reference for information about using the Spitzer instruments and selecting the appropriate AOT parameters Additional comments about the AOTs are provided in sections 9 and 11 of this Guide There are nine Spitzer AOTs fully implemented in Spot Five of the AOTs were commissioned within the first three months after launch these are IRS Staring Mode IRS Spectral Mapping IRAC Mapping MIPS Scan Map MIPS Photometry Super Resolution A sixth AOT was available to Cycle 1 programs but not commissioned until 6 months after launch this is MIPS Spectral Energy Distribution Two additional AOTs became available to Cycle 2 observers these are MIPS Total Power mode IRS Peak Up Imaging For Cycle 3 the IRAC Mapping AOR was modified to include Stellar Mode see section 11 1 2 The MIPS Photometry Super Resolution AOT has been modified to include an Enhanced photometry mode at 160 um This mode was commissioned during Cycle 4 See section 11 7 2 The IRAC Post Cryo Mapping AOR has been added and will be commissioned for Cycle 6 See section 11 1 5 June 18 2008 22 Spot User s Guide v18 7 5 Tools Menu 7 5 1 AOR Replication Tool The AOR Replication Tool allows Spot to automatically create a number of AORs by merging a template AOR and a list of targets For every target in your selected group an AOR with the template parameters will
228. onal information for your sky background location be careful to stay within about 30 to a maximum of 1 from your target position Ignore completing the proper motion fields in this dialog Click OK in this dialog and an AOR template will appear for your sky background observation Figure 93 Here you can modify the desired IRS modules ramp durations and number of cycles for this observation Click OK in the AOR dialog and you will see that the target and sky background AOR are automatically grouped or chained in execution sequence Figure 94 through a chaining constraint see section 13 3 Using the group follow on tool you can modify the parameters of this constraint Figure 95 We recommend that you leave the AORs chained since this will attempt to ensure that the two sets of observations are executed close in time this is important since the zodiacal light background which usually is the dominant background contribution is variable in time eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z Ir1 al SA Sen n lt le ll Ta La ee Pav a lw as as Z Gam Weal S 22 49 m se se as B BB SO 188 D Observations Astronomical Observation Requests AORs Label Target Position Type T G F Instrument Stat Duration On IRSS 0000 Geminga 6h33m54 Fixed Single C fA gt IRS Staring new 1185 IRSS 0000_backg Geminga_back 6h34m02 Fixed Single M IRS Staring new 472 v IC Observations
229. op FOV 2 offset Y 12 Z 4 pixels MIPS SED 5 SED 3 chop FOV 1 offset Y 18 Z 4 pixels MIPS SED 6 SED 3 chop FOV 2 offset Y 18 Z 4 pixels MIPS _SED_7 SED 1 chop FOV 1 offset Y 6 Z 4 pixels MIPS SED 8 SED 1 chop FOV 2 offset Y 6 Z 4 pixels MIPS SED center Y center of 70 um array Z center of 70 um 0 9arcmin Minus Y LGA boresight Center of minus Y LGA boresight Plus Y LGA _boresight Center of plus Y LGA boresight Reserved for PCS DEFINE FRAME STA1_boresight Center of STA1 boresight STA2_boresight Center of STA2 boresight Telescope Boresight Center of focal plane June 18 2008 163 Spot User s Guide v18 16 Moving Target Visualization 16 1 Overview Asan aid to planning your Spitzer solar system observations Spot provides the capability to display the position of moving targets on the infrared sky as a function of date and time In addition the user can also visualize the position of a moving object with respect to the Spitzer focal plane instrument apertures diffraction spikes and other nearby moving objects Visualization of a planned or an already executed Spitzer AOR for a moving target is also supported and shows the positions on the sky of individual data frames within an AOR taking into account both the spacecraft and moving object s motion Visualization of an AOR in the object s rest frame is currently not explicitly supported for moving targets but can be mimicked by selecting a posi
230. ovachekcececosaceencectczes 18 TRTO Search PFOSISIMS eege e eege Eeer ek 19 TAAL Check Program shifee trEW u u ee eebe ee ee deene deeg 19 71212 Quits ON i s asuhuhaunukuanahukuakuanahanakanahasuakiahahaakiaahanakik 20 D2 EGIL EE 20 PDA Und etrEZ u k ll ma E E apanakuna aysa res 20 722 Delete Selected AORs etr lt X delete u u l R u eeu Ra Nova sees 20 723 Modify Current AOR ctrleM u ua ua shanukanahanakanahahuakihahahahiahanaga 20 7 21 Copy Selected AORS etrEC u k l y a e 20 KE ER ENEE 20 72 6 Delete All Targets innri cece cece cosa cecececs cose sees caltcusacececvcs cule suse cuckcusacecasesa deier deiere deht 20 72 7 Enable All AORS Ctrl E yes u s aaa qaa ua NEESS 21 7 2 8 Disable All AORs without G F Constraints Tert Dl 21 7 2 9 Toggle ON Flag AORs without G F Constraints ctrl W a 21 Hoe Vangets E UE 21 Tel New Eargetr Cre Tis scored u ma Sau ST i aT u aaa 21 Ta Delete Selected Targets um aa u muu Sau ayasa a sa yaa 21 June 18 2008 2 Spot User s Guide v18 Tide Modify E 21 Gok Pareetbiste Jet k a aka a h Qa ege geesde ce Ehe 21 73 5 Calculate Visibility Windows for All Targets n nu 21 7 3 6 Calculate Background for All Targets ccc cececesessesecseeseesecsecseeecsecsecsecaecsecsessecsecsecsesaeeaesaeeaeeas 22 TA Observation Mem ua si Ce gee E 22 L Fools Men SS k tenses at Sa Eed E Moore Reve ees Be
231. ovide an accurate estimate of sky brightness for IRAC observations especially on or near the ecliptic plane Ea UEN Wavelength microns 24 00 Date preference e Calculate Range When Visible Calculate for Specific Date Universal Time Date Time Do Estimate Figure 67 The Spot Background Estimate dialog The user enters the desired wavelength If no date is entered Spot returns a minimum and maximum estimate of the background for the range of dates the target is visible If a date is entered Spot calculates the estimate for the date and time June 18 2008 79 Spot User s Guide v18 10 9 2 Spot Background Estimate If you are interested in the background on larger angular scales Spot provides a background estimate This is accessed via the Background button on the Spot target entry dialog which pops up a dialog shown in Figure 67 The observer enters the desired wavelength and optionally a date and time date and time is required for a moving target background estimate Spot returns either minimum and maximum estimates of the background over the time period when the target is visible if no date is entered or an estimate for the specified date The units for the estimates are MJy sr For more information please see the Estimating the Sky Background link off the Spitzer Proposal Kit webpage The beam size of the interstellar medium component of Spot s background model is A The output will look like
232. ow that you do not want to avoid your selected target To calculate your visibility windows without taking the presence of bright objects in your target field into account ensure that the Eartht Moon and Others boxes are not checked 10 6 Target List Pressing the current target list button will bring up a dialog with the list of targets an example of which is shown in Figure 63 From this dialog you can highlight a target in the list by clicking on the rows in the list and then delete targets from the list or modify a target entry The Calculate Visibility Windows for All Targets pull down from the Targets menu allows you to calculate visibility windows for your entire list of targets all at once The Show Visibility button from the List of Targets function reports the windows when the selected target or the list of targets will be visible to Spitzer The Calculate Background for All Targets pull down from the Targets menu allows you to calculate backgrounds for your entire list of targets all at once section 10 9 3 The Show Background button from the List of Targets function reports these backgrounds for the list Get Visibility Windows _ Spitzer visibility windows for target m31_ Window Open Window Close Duration days mg 2003 Aug 26 00 05 00 2003 Aug 28 07 08 00 2 3 2003 Dec 17 07 07 00 2004 Jan 31 19 55 00 45 5 2004 Jul 15 06 50 00 2004 Aug 31 21 06 00 47 6 2004 Dec 22 05 06 00 2005 Feb 06 04 24 00 46 0 2005 Jul 22 14 1
233. own in Figure 7 If you have Just submitted a modification to your program via Check In Program see section 7 1 11 you will not be able to use View Program to see the modification immediately after submission Programs that are Checked In for modification are loaded into a modification database and will be verified by the SSC before being transferred to our Operations Database this will likely take more than one day When the Database has been updated you can then use View Program to see your newly modified program O WT le Target m51 Type Fixed Single Position 13h29m52 37s 47d11m40 8s New Target Modify Target Target List Radius Arc Minutes 5 00 Instrument Section Please Select AOTs and Wavelengths l None IRAC ail None IRS All None MIPS ail M IRAC Mapping IRS Staring M MIPS Photometry v IRAC Post Cryo Mapping 4 IRS Spectral Mapping v MIPS Scan x 36 v IRS Peakup Image m MIPS SED ES M Hi 10 0 19 5 um vi 4 5 um V Hi 19 3 37 0 um Ei MIPS Total Power M s 8 um M Low 5 3 8 5 um M 24 um M 8 0 um RW Low 7 5 14 2 um M 70 um default Mi Low 14 2 21 8 um Mw 70 um fine scale M Low 20 6 40 0 um Mw Peakup Arrays M 160 um Help Cancel OK Figure 8 Dialog to search the SSC databases for AORs in approved programs with target positions within the user specified search radius around the current target You can also select the AOT s and wavelength s returned from these programs June 18 20
234. packaged together as Spitzer Pride Spot Leopard should be installed on the computer where you want to run it The start up script is not configured to allow it to run on an X terminal You can run them across a Sparc network if it is installed on a disk that is nfs mounted across the network We can run Spot and Leopard in this fashion at the SSC The first step is to download the software from the SSC Proposal Kit web page onto your hard disk http ssc spitzer caltech edu propkit spot 5 1 Windows Installation After downloading the software double click on the Spitzer pride18 windows exe file to install Spot Click on the Spot icon to start the program 5 2 Solaris or Linux Installation 1 Go to the directory where you installed the Spitzer pride18 solaris sh or Spitzer pride1 8 linux sh file You must have write permission in this directory and should have at least 200 MB of free disk space 2 At the UNIX Linux prompt type chmod x Spitzer pride18 solaris sh or Spitzer pride1 8 linux sh to make the file executable 3 Type Spitzer pride18 solaris sh or Spitzer pride18 linux sh to run the installation script 4 When the script asks you for the directory name where you want to install Spot be sure to type the full directory path e g scr user my_pride Make sure the directories exist before you try to install it there If you are in the directory scr user and just type my_ pride it will tell you that the directory name
235. particular time delay A circumstance where this might commonly be used is if you are doing a test peak up observation with IRS and you don t want to execute the IRS spectral science observation until you have been able to confirm that the peak up will be successful The peak up only observation would go first and the peak up plus spectrum observation would be linked to it with a follow on constraint Another example would be where you need the imaging of a target done before the spectroscopy You could create follow on constraints from one imaging AOR to multiple spectroscopy AORs A more complicated hypothetical example of how to use a follow on constraint is described below Assume you want to take observations of an object with some periodic behavior and you want spectra at two different phases in the cycle In this example phase 1 occurs every 10 5 days and lasts for 8 hours and after the first observation is made you want to capture phase 2 36 72 hours later To do this you would create the 2 AORs that you want to link and use the following steps to apply the constraints Use the timing constraint discussed in section 13 2 to constrain the first phase In Figure 110 we show 3 timing windows that would capture phase 1 every 10 5 days with an 8 hour window June 18 2008 117 Spot User s Guide v18 After applying the timing constraint to the phase 1 observation the main AOR window should reflect that the timing cons
236. pe Moving Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 172 Displayed track of Comet Encke on an ISSA plate background The Number of Points selected was 100 16 3 Getting Fancy Now you have an infrared image of the sky with the path of your object across it centered on the observation date you entered On the lower right side of the Spot window notice that there are two groups of small icons Figure 173 one labeled Base Image and the other labeled with your target name The S icon is a toggle that turns each display component on and off The XI icon will delete the component with which it is associated use with caution If you do inadvertently delete something you had merely wanted to switch off for a moment you can only recover it by going through the original steps required to display that component June 18 2008 166 Spot User s Guide v18 Encke EE E Base Image EE wa Figure 173 Icons associated with each layer drawn in the visualization frame In this case there is an ISSA Image and the track of Comet Encke is overlaid Clicking the check mark will hide the layer Clicking the X will delete it Clicking will allow you to modify the opacity of the displayed image Clicking the color grid will allow you to modify the color table options for the displayed image Clicking the table icon will show you the image header information 16 3 1 Highlighting Points and Displaying Date Markings on a Moving Target
237. per motion field Proposers should also check for the presence of bright neighbors around peak up stars SEHR Figure 82 Example 2MASS Peak up Candidates list showing F through M type stars which are good or acceptable for the blue 16 um peak up array After pressing the OK button in the Surface Brightness window the tool proceeds to search for 2MASS peak up stars within 30 of the target This is done by using the 100 um background surface brightness to extrapolate the background in either the blue 16 um or red 22 um peak up array bandpass to then determine the minimum brightness of an acceptable peak up star in the 2MASS catalog The search may take some time but when done a window displaying Peak Up Candidates will list a set of suitable candidates June 18 2008 92 Spot User s Guide v18 The Peak Up Candidates window labels in its first column the stars as GOOD for blue GOOD for red or Acceptable See Figure 82 You may need to stretch and widen the window to read the whole contents of each column The GOOD for blue and GOOD for red designations correspond to stars whose flux densities are within the limits specified above for each peak up array The flux densities mJy in columns 5 and 6 of the Candidates window are listed at 16 and 22 um which are the approximate effective wavelengths for the blue and red filters respectively of the IRS peak up arrays The Acceptable designation is for
238. posal You will use this name if you resubmit your proposal cme O Figure 136 Proposal Submit dialog window Enter a proposal user name and password confirm the password and include the submitter s email address If no problems during the transfer to the SSC are detected Spot will inform you that the submission was successful as shown in Figure 137 A receipt of submission will be sent from the SSC to the submitter s email address as well as to the PI and the TC After you enter a Proposal user name Spot will fill in this information in the lower left corner of the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window Figure 138 If the submission is interrupted or if you cancel out of the submission process Spot will remove this information from the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window and the coversheet file that you just saved You can always try to use the same proposal user name when you submit your proposal at a later time Successful Submission Your proposal was successfully submitted Figure 137 Spot will bring up this dialog window if your proposal was successfully transferred to the SSC The submitter will also receive a confirmation email Optional Add any Extra Text Clear lt No Optional Extra Text gt Optional Add Joint Observatories Clear NOAO File Name soifer_m31 cs Proposai User Name soifer_m31 Figure 138 Proposal user Name and coversheet File Name now appear in the Proposal Su
239. positions in the direction perpendicular to the slit columns This is shown graphically in Figure 90 The upper part shows steps in the direction parallel to the slit The lower part shows steps in the direction perpendicular to the slit IRS maps must be less than 1 on a side To determine the appropriate step size for your observation we list in Table 1 the slit lengths and widths All of the peak up options discussed for the IRS Staring AOT in section 11 2 also apply for the IRS Spectral Mapping AOT Unique AOR Label RSM 0000 Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31000s 41d16m09 4000s Hew Target Modify Targ Target List Peak Up Settings Choose one Peak Up mode IRSPeak Up PCRS Peak Up No Peak Up _ Peakup Target Accuracy Moderate v Specifications Offset P Type E Peak up Bands Blue 13 3 18 7 um e A Rac 0 000 Offset a Dec 0 000 _ Extended Source O Position A y fo 2MASS selection Flux Density Instrument Settings Number Of Map Cycles 1 IRS Slit OnRRamp Du 1 Cycles Pointings Parallel Step Par Pointings Perpe Step Perp Hi9 9 19 6um ep xhi 5 100 00 5 100 00 Hi18 7 37 2um em ei 5 100 00 5 100 00 Low 5 2 8 7 um ei 60 wi 5 100 00 5 100 00 Low 7 4 14 5um v 60 sch 1
240. possible 10 8 Position Angle Focal Plane IRS Slits MIPS Scan amp SED Slit Computing the position angle of the Spitzer focal plane can be done from the Visibility Orientation dialog shown in Figure 64 The position angle for a user selected date is reported as the degrees east of celestial north of the Spitzer to Sun vector projected onto the sky The default is with respect to equatorial north but the user can also have the position angle reported with respect to ecliptic and galactic north by clicking on the pull down menu The nominal field of view locations and the direction of the Spitzer to Sun vector projected onto the sky are shown in Figure 66 To determine a position angle enter an acceptable date from the visibility window range into the Observation Date entry field and click on the Compute Position Angle button Spot will now return the projected Position Angle on the sky degrees E of N at your target on the specified date for the Spitzer focal plane The position angles for the IRS slit modules and peak up arrays the MIPS in scan direction and the MIPS SED slit are also reported An IRAC map column and the MIPS in scan direction run vertically in Figure 66 An IRAC map row and the MIPS cross scan direction run horizontally June 18 2008 T4 Spot User s Guide v18 Nominal Field of View Locations Projected onto the Sky MIPS 70 um IRS Slit Full FOV PCRS Long Low MIPS SED Slit IRS Slit d
241. ppear in print Proposal Abstract Please limit your text to 2040 charaters Enter a nifty abstract here It should accurately describe your proposal Figure 126 The top part of the Proposal Submission Tool Abstract window Type in the abstract or read it in from a file When finished click the Done button at the bottom of the window Look In spot E e Pi CH B alive cache TD proposal pdf File Name Files of Type PDF m Cancel Open Figure 127 Proposal Submission Tool Add Scientific Justification File Open dialog box You can enter the filename or browse the directories and files to locate the correct file 14 6 Add Scientific Justification File Clicking on this button will bring up an Open dialog box You can enter the path and filename or browse for the correct directory and file as shown in Figure 127 June 18 2008 127 Spot User s Guide v18 Enter or choose the correct path and filename and click Open The Proposal Submission Tool will add the path and filename to the Main Window Figure 128 When you submit the proposal Spot will look for this path and filename for the file and transfer the file to the SSC Done Modify Proposal Abstract Clear Enter a nifty abstract here It should acc Done Change Proposal PDF File Clear shome user spot proposal pdf Add Science Category Information Clear
242. provide you with a list of NAIF IDs June 18 2008 70 Spot User s Guide v18 to select from Figure 58 It is important to select the correct NAIF ID for your object as the NAIF ID is the single identifier Spitzer uses to provide ephemeris information for planning and scheduling Spot will automatically retrieve ephemeredes from Horizon if they are not contained in Spot s original core set As a rough guide to distinguishing between NAIF IDs NAIF numbering has the following conventions 7 digit numbers starting with 1 comets 7 digit numbers starting with 2 numbered asteroids 7 digit numbers starting with 3 relatively newly discovered objects e g some asteroids and KBOs 3 digit numbers planets and planetary satellites digit numbers planetary system barycenters Target Name required Resolve To Naif ID ke 3 ooo Visibility Orientation Background Fixed Single Fixed Cluster Fixed Cluster Positions Moving Single Moving Cluster Standard Ephemeris User Defined Ephemeris Date i Epoch Parameters T Eccentricity Longitude Perihelion distance AU deg Inclination of orbit deg LI deg Bright Moving Objects to Avoid v Earth Moon v Others Figure 60 The entry dialog for a moving single target with a user defined ephemeris This is where you enter a target that does not yet have a
243. r and the Animation w Trail button shows the successive pointings but leaves a trail showing the apertures for all previous pointings in the sequence Use current moving target date A This moving target is already plotted Figure 179 When attempting to overlay AORs on an image for a moving target this dialog appears indicating that the track for the target is already plotted on the image and asking whether or not to use the current moving target date Multiple AORs for the same moving target can be displayed e g an IRAC and a MIPS AOT You may wish to check off the previous AOR using the H icon but not remove which is done by clicking on the E icon when doing this to clearly see the new AOR overlaid June 18 2008 172 Spot User s Guide v18 16 4 2 An Illustrative Example Visualizing a small IRAC 5x5 map of Comet Encke 1 Enter Encke 1000025 as a moving single target using the Spot Target entry window the bull s eye icon 2 From the Images menu select ISSA image Make sure that Encke is the target in the ISSA image dialog window Accept the defaults e g 5 image size and press OK Enter 2006 Aug 12 00 00 00 as your selected date this is not the default but the midpoint of the first visibility window in 2006 You can select this by clicking on the date range for that window 3 Resize the Spot window to fill the screen and use the magnifying glass with the red plus sign upper left
244. r each image In Figure 154 we show an example of a MSX 8 um image overlaid on a DSS image of NGC 2024 In this example the opacity for each image has been adjusted to 50 You can vary an image s opacity by adjusting the slider on the control You can continue to overlay additional images if desired Also you can perform these image overlays in color red green or blue by selecting Make This a 3 Color Plot when overlaying an image The three color image visualization described in section 15 1 5 is analogous to this utility eee Spot Spitzer Planning Observations og Zito wl sm sm wl a ggl i wla alul DDD else v e m ewe 1 2 3 TEENS ase l IS EI W e Mouse Control Ka Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Geen Z Mouse Any I Image Opacity Opacity I eee ngc 2024 POSS2 UKSTU Red a i Percent Opaque 50 EH E ar EE J Image Opacity ir Opacity yanta Percent Opaque 50 El Observations Bee 2024 POSS2 UKSTURed Pague ot Target ngc 2024 Type Fixed Single Done o Figure 154 An example of Image Overlays Here we have overlaid a MSX 8 um image on a DSS image of NGC 2024 The opacity of each image can be adjusted using the opacity control In this example each image s opacity has been adjusted to 50 15 6 Using the Slice Tool You can extract a slice of an image i e the radial distribution of flux as
245. rget Modify Target Target List Catalog Selections _ IRAS Point Source Catalog Where _ IRAS Faint Source Catalog e Overlay catalog in current frame 2MASS Point Source Catalog Overlay catalog in all frames C 2MASS Extended Source Catalog The Midcourse Space Experiment Catalog NED Catalog Radius Degrees gt 2 50000 Figure 26 Spot currently serves six IPAC catalogs that can be overlaid onto the image display eoe Catalog Overlay from SkyView Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s Modify Target Available Catalogs HEAO 1 A 1 X Ray Source Catalog 0 HEAO 1 Al Lightcurves HEAO 1 A2 Pointed Lightcurves HEAO 1 A2 Scanned Lightcurves HEAO 1 A 2 LED Catalog HEAO 1 A 2 Piccinotti Catalog HEAO 1 A2 Porna J a b OOG L F Where Clear Selections Overlay catalog in current frame Radius Arc Seconds 72 0 Overlay catalog in all frames Help Cancel 7 Er OK 2 Figure 27 Spot currently serves catalogs from HEASARC that can be overlaid onto the image display June 18 2008 34 Spot User s Guide v18 ee Catalog Overlay from VizieR Beta Target m31 Type Fixed Single Position 0h42m44 31s 41d16m09 4s Modify Target Available Catalogs LENS 0 AC 2000 2 Catalogue Urban 2001 All sky Compiled Catalogue of 2 5 million stars Kharchenko 2001 1 Gezari 1999 All Ca
246. rid Specifications Map Center Offset Cross Scan Step Cross scan arcsec 0 Return Leg arcsec 0 E In scan arcsec O Forward Leg aresec 0 w Number of Scan Legs 2 Number of Map Cycles i Scan Leg Length degrees 1 00 D Backward Mapping O Yes e No 1r lit Flux Density Cale Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window koa Figure 97 The MIPS Scan Map AO T 11 6 3 MIPS Scan 160 um data warnings Spot will warn you whether the160 um field of view filling is uncertain for FAST scan rate scan legs longer than 5 See the MIPS chapter in the Spitzer Observer s Manual 11 7 MIPS Photometry Super Resolution The MIPS photometry mode is designed to obtain multi band observations of reasonably compact sources sources that are too extended for the procedures described below should instead be imaged using MIPS scan mapping Super resolution mode emphasizes thorough sampling of the point spread function via a combination of small pixels relative to the Airy disk and of sub stepping of the image relative to the pixels Special observing modes are used to achieve this goal at 70 and 160 um and at 70 um a separate optical train providing a finer pixel scale is also employed The MIPS PH SR mode AOT is shown in Figure 98 June 18 2008 105 Spot User s Guide v18 eoe MIPS Photometry Super Resolution Unique AOR Label MIPSP 0000 Target m31 Type F
247. s Optional Add any Extra Text Clear lt No Optional Extra Text gt Done Modify Joint Observatories Clear NOAO Figure 132 Part of the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window showing the Add Joint Observatories option Please enter HST CXO NOAO and or NRAO for joint proposals HOA Cancel Help Figure 133 Proposal Submission Tool Joint Observatories dialog for entering one or more of the four other observatories HST CXO NOAO and NRAO available for joint proposals Consult the Call for Proposals for policies regarding joint programs with other observatories June 18 2008 129 Spot User s Guide v18 14 10 Hours Requested in the Proposal non Archive and Theory proposals only When you have finalized your AORs and know the total observatory time you will request in your proposal shown in the lower right corner of the main Observations window be sure to add this information manually into the Proposal Submission Tool 14 11 Dollars Requested Archive and Theory Proposals Only If you will be submitting an Archive or Theory Proposal you need to select the Archive Theory Proposal Type in the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window and enter the appropriate value in the Dollars Requested field Check the Call for Proposals for any additional information regarding Archive and Theory Proposals 14 12 The Final Stretch Submitting the Proposal 14 12 1 The Prologue To successfully su
248. s 7 1 9 and 7 1 10 to assess possible duplications of your AORs with those of other programs etc For AORs that have already been executed the overlay is automatically displayed for the observation date press the replot EI Icon in the layer control box to enter a different date for the overlay in the visibility window dialog see Section 15 7 2 and Figure 157 MOP Slice Controls Segment Color H Save Data Save Image Slice Segment Distance Units Start Position End Position Ds Degrees Eq J2000 RA 5h41m44 54s Eq J2000 RA 5h41m23 54s 735 54 arcsec G Arcseconds Eq J2000 Dec 1d54m18 1s Eq J2000 Dec 1d43m13 4s Arcminutes Flux vs Position ngc 2024 POSS2 UKSTU Red Rubber band zoom drag backward to restore the original 15 000 1015 981 14000 0 000175 13 000 0 000150 12 000 0 000125 11 000 x 2 0 000100 E 10 000 S 9 000 0 000075 3 d CA 0 000050 7 000 0 000025 6 000 0 000000 a a a Ei a a a a a a a a a ee S S S SS 5 45 E ee E e e e E E EE EE EE EE 2 2 a a EA EA Ki m n 2 N Dal Lei gt 3 SS i S B 3 Image Pixel X Y ngc 2024 POSS2 UKSTU Red e Axis 2 MSX A ngc 2024 Help Done Figure 156 Once you have traced out your image slice the Slice Tool dialog window will open showing the slice Holding the cursor over any of the points shows the position and flux for that point Holding down the right mouse button brings up a menu of options for zoo
249. s for the present cursor position The Readout Prefs dialog is how you select those values For example you can display the equatorial and ecliptic coordinates or any coordinate system versus image pixel The read out works for both the main image display and the thumbnail display shown to the right of the read out boxes June 18 2008 47 Spot User s Guide v18 eoe seo Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Z A Sm alale E i a EB gaya CH EE z res es E a Flux 4 997 MJY SR 0h42m48 EE Tx 100 000 P SIT 1 Pixel 90 000 Eq J2000 Dec 41d17m06 ge Ty 101 000 3 Mouse Control w gt Mouse _ Any Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Figure 45 Spot displays the three different pairs of values for the cursor position on the image currently being displayed On the far left Spot shows the flux or DN value and the pixel scale In the center and right Spot displays two different user selected coordinates The format of these two columns is selected from the Readout Prefs item in the Options menu 7 8 7 Cache Prefs Spot caches the images that it retrieves from remote servers to the local disk so that the images are available locally the next time you ask Spot to display them This saves time and network traffic The first time you retrieve an image Spot will ask you to designate a cache directory You can change the location or size of the disk cache directory from this dialog Figure 4
250. see section 11 7 There are three selectable ramp exposure times for each of these three options 6 14 and 30 seconds Each peak up field of view can have its own integration parameters ramp times and numbers of cycles It is important to consider saturation when selecting a ramp time especially for bright sources and or high background For mapping the grid is centered on the target position an odd number of map positions in rows and or columns will result in an observation centered on the target in the row and or column direction conversely an even number of map positions results in the target being centered between map positions Map positions may be specified either in array or celestial coordinates An offset in each of the grid directions row or column can be specified and is useful for very large maps Dithering helps to remove detector problems such as bad pixels latent images or pixel to pixel errors in the flat field Two sets of standard dither patterns for PUI are available random and cycling An IRS PUI AOR cannot be longer in total duration than the 8 hour IRS AOR limit Therefore longer maps must be broken into separate AORs 11 6 MIPS Scan Map The scan map mode is designed to provide efficient mapping of large areas on the sky A ramp motion of the scan mirror compensates for continuous telescope scanning motion freezing the images on the arrays The scan map mode avoids having to repoint and stabilize the telescope b
251. select a segment Shift Left Button Center the Image at point Mouse Slice Tool Es ngc 2024 POSS2 UKSTU Red ZE IS e ele ZE E Observations Target ngc 2024 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 0 0 Figure 155 Once the Slice Tool under the Overlays menu also the Slice Tool icon in the image manipulation and overlays tool bar along the left side has been selected drag the cursor across the image while holding the left mouse button to produce the image slice 15 7 Overlaying AORs Descriptions of how to overlay the Spitzer focal plane and AORs were given in sections 7 7 12 and 7 7 14 We now provide some examples that explain in more detail how to use the AOR visualization features Overlaying the area footprint of your AOR will be particularly useful if you are concerned about covering or avoiding particular features on the sky and need to determine how the AOR will be oriented on the sky during its visibility periods This is also a valuable tool in assessing whether or not the science you hope to accomplish with the AOR will be successful Jr is always a good practice to visualize your AORs as you develop your observations for proposal submission or program revision You can also overlay the AORs from approved programs lists of June 18 2008 147 Spot User s Guide v18 which can be obtained from the View Program and Search Programs utilities under the File menu see section
252. somebody else s observing strategy could be a guide for how you want to observe Download using Leopard and analyze public data for similar science to gauge your estimates of sensitivity requirements etc 7 Check that your favorite target s are not too bright or faint for Spitzer Remember that the sky background can be significant at some infrared wavelengths 8 Use Spot to fill out AOTs and create AORs Check the visibility of your observations especially if you need to time constrain your observations Use Spot to visualize just how your observations will be executed on the sky Is it what you expected Check for bright objects to avoid using the Spitzer Bright Objects for AOR overlay 9 Start writing that scientific justification You must use the template The final file must be in PDF format See the Call for Proposals for details on what you need to include in your justification 10 Early in your planning open the Proposal Submission Tool in Spot and see what kind of administrative information we need from you Create a coversheet file as you work on your proposal Save a final clean version to disk when you are about ready to submit your proposal Be sure that the hours requested and scientific justification file are correct The coversheet information will be ingested into our database when you submit your proposal It will be used by the SSC during the technical and science review of your proposal If your proposal is approve
253. spheric models to predict spectral type and flux densities at the effective wavelengths of the IRS peak up blue and red arrays The tool outputs a list of stars whose flux densities are between a minimum value always 10 mJy determined as a function of the local background surface brightness and a maximum value of either 150 mJy for the blue filter or 340 mJy for June 18 2008 91 Spot User s Guide v18 the red filter In order to determine the minimum peak up star flux density the tool uses the Blue Peak up function displayed in the IRS chapter of the Spitzer Observer s Manual Chapter 7 showing the relation between minimum acceptable peak up star brightness vs 100 um background surface brightness Surface Brightness Surface Brightness at 100 micron MJy Sr 0 00 Calculate Surface Brightness Cancel Help Figure 81 Surface brightness dialog which appears for the 2MASS peak up star selection tool You can either manually enter a value for the 100 um surface brightness at your target location or allow Spot to automatically calculate this for you when you press Calculate Surface Brightness Click on OK after a surface brightness value has been entered The resulting Surface Brightness dialog Figure 81 window prompts you to enter the needed 100 um surface brightness There are two options either enter a surface brightness if already known or let Spot calculate it by pressing the Calculate Surface Bri
254. sscsseeeeeeeeeeseceeceececsececsecsecsecsecaecsecsececsecaececsecaecsecaesaesaesesaesaesaeeas 99 11 4 IRS High Resolution Modules and Sky Background Observations 100 12 52 IRS ER ue LE 104 LEG MIPS Scat Map QSnaan hana a qaa utes eietncenecnseinedaeususegseandertenagiendsonsereddecndsaderedieedcenecsedaeesdeeedeee 104 TEGL In Scan Versus Cross Scan Directions terreri retestro Te ir E EAEE 104 11 6 2 160 Um Data Required Checkbox ee 104 11 6 3 MIPS Scan 160 Um data warning EEN 105 11 7 MIPS Photometry Super Resolution cccceccescssesesseseeseseeseseesesceseseeseecseeecseseeseesesesaeesseneseeeeaeeaees 105 11271 Raster Maps Rows vs GolgiinS n p l ak D Sal ab aS deve al enee deeg 106 11 7 2 Enhanced Photometry Mode for 160 vm 107 11 8 MIPS Spectral Energy DISftfibUtion l l q n Waw qawa 107 119 MIPS Total Power Mode 108 12 Tools tor EE EE 109 12 1 AOR Replication Tool 109 12 2 Target Replication Tool ya aqa aqa sqa qa aaah aia ha qq wa 109 13 Constramtse Ee ction sta een BO E Qa RES en ua E 111 1331 r Description E 111 13 2 Tuning Constraints x secs cscs sonion cucu sees cose cess sues EE E EETA E EOE TAT E ETO E 111 13 3 Grouping Follow on ConstfalBtsS u k uususushakhhakihiakikianuakamuasuaqsiakakiihicdhiuissas 112 13 25 LIESE MOM scat ak kayana hak aaa en een E E ert tens 112 13 3 2 Caveats for Grouping Constraints cc ccccesceseeseeseeseeecseeseeseesecsecseesecsecse
255. stars also within the limits of one or both arrays However the Acceptable stars are late type giant supergiants with possible dust shells Therefore their model flux densities for the peak up channels may be underestimated because they are solely photospheric predictions and therefore these stars are a comparatively less suitable set of candidates Click anywhere on the row of information for a star to select it Then click OK You are then presented with a target entry dialog in which you can input a source name for the peak up star optional and the proper motions shown in Figure 83 Note that the correct units for the proper motion entry are arcseconds per year It is not necessary to adjust the 2MASS peak up star s coordinates from the epoch of observation to epoch 2000 0 Once you have modified the peak up star information you can continue to make further modifications or simply view the information at any time by pressing the View Modify Peak up Target which will appear in the main IRS Staring AOT see e g Figure 87 Target Name optional SIMBAD Resolve the Name 2MASS peak up star HD 46088 Visibility Orientation Background Fixed Single Coord Sys Equatorial J2000 w Proper Motion RA 6h32m02 30s v Use Proper Motion Dec 17d39m54 2s PMRA CHE 0015 Epoch 199780 EA rer eee 0 018 Bright Moving Objects to Avoid v Earth Moon v Others Figure 83 Target entry dialog for a selected 2MASS peak up star
256. systems and target entry formats supported by Spot The other features accessed from the target entry dialog are NED SIMBAD Target Name Resolution Sky Background Estimates for inertial targets Visibility Windows for inertial and moving targets June 18 2008 64 Spot User s Guide v18 Position Angle of the Spitzer focal plane IRS Slits and Peak Up array MIPS Scan axis and SED slit for a given target and date Avoidance of Bright Moving Objects that might be in your target field 10 1 Target Types You must define your target using one of the following target types These are selected from tabs in the target entry dialog 10 1 1 Fixed Single A fixed single target is one object or map center outside of the solar system This default entry dialog is shown in Figure 54 Target Target Name required SIMBAD Resolve the Name Visibility Orientation Background Fixed Cluster Fixed Cluster Positions Moving Single Moving Cluster Fixed Single Coord Sys Equatorial J2000 gt Proper Motion RA v Use Proper Motion PM RA An 0 000 PM Dec yr 0 000 Dec Epoch 2000 00 Number Offset EastRow Perpendicular Offset North Column Parallel III P O cob NOD n amp wh EN Offset Coordinates e C
257. t Observation Date Target Visibility by Spitzer Target Name Encke Window opens Window closes Duration 2006 Dec 03 17 02 00 2007 Jan 08 16 30 00 36 0 2007 Jun 20 02 07 00 2007 Jul 20 02 06 00 30 0 2007 Oct 15 13 18 00 2007 Nov 28 18 18 00 44 2 2008 Jul 05 11 29 00 2008 Aug 13 12 37 00 39 0 0 2008 Nov 26 19 26 00 2009 Jan 04 22 34 00 39 1 4 2009 Aug 03 14 42 00 2009 Sep 13 09 37 00 40 8 Y rSelect Observation Date s Date 2008 Dec 16 Time 00 00 00 r Number of Points Points o Cancel OK Figure 171 Target Visibility dialog for Comet Encke The Number of Points allows you to choose the number of date points Spot will display for your moving target You can then animate through the track of the moving target on the displayed image June 18 2008 165 Spot User s Guide v18 If you are displaying on an ISSA 2MASS DSS or NED image the track of your object across that image on the date specified should now be visible in the Spot window Figure 172 If you are displaying on an All Sky Image you will need to go to the Overlays menu and select Add Moving Target before the track will be displayed OO Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Zelle BD ejs eje a Glgelelslee Left Mouse Button Select a point on the Image Shift Left Button Center the Image at point ISSA 25 micron Encke Lele l Ki J s W EI Observations MW ISSA 25 micron Encke Target Encke Ty
258. t User s Guide v18 Constraint Editor Tool Add Constraint then Drag AORs to Constraint Window Group Follow On Shadow Add Constraints Parameters Add Sequencing Add Group Within Modify Paramete Add Chaining Add AOR Timing Add Comments Perform Action Remove Get AOR Move Up Move Down Drop AORs Constraints 2 BJ Sequence 0000 Total Duration 00 00 00 1 2 B Chain 0000 Total Duration 00 00 00 1 2 B Group 0001 Total Duration 00 00 00 Apply Cancel Help Figure 108 The constraint editor dialog with 3 new constraints added No AORs have been linked to these constraints yet Constraint Editor Constraint Editor Tool Add Constraint then Drag AORs to Constraint Window Group Follow On Shadow Add Constraints Parameters Add Sequencing Add Group Within Modify Paramete Add Chaining Add AOR Timing Add Comments Perform Action Remove Get AOR Drop AORs Constraints 2 5 Group 0001 Total Duration 00 00 00 1 2 3 Chain 0000 Total Duration 00 00 00 o 1 2 Sequence 0000 Total Duration 00 59 08 Cas Amap 1 Cas A map 2 Cas A map 3 Cas A map 4 Figure 109 After linking four AORs to the Sequence 0000 constraint the constraint editor will look like this You can ma
259. t cannot read this file back in 7 1 6 Save Target Visibility Windows The menu item is only active if you have calculated visibility windows for targets in your target list If you select it you can write the current visibility windows in memory to a text file Spot cannot read this file back in 7 1 7 Save Current Plotted Image as FITS file ctrl F If you are currently displaying an image in Spot selected from the Images menu this will save the image as a FITS file It does not save any overlays just the image 7 1 8 Save Current Plotted Image amp Overlays to JPEG GIF BMP PNG ctrl J If you are currently displaying an image in Spot selected from the Images menu this will save the image along with any overlays as a GIF JPEG BMP bitmap or PNG format file June 18 2008 17 Spot User s Guide v18 Program Name or ID Cancel Help Figure 7 Dialog to enter a program ID number or name to View Program 7 1 9 View Program ctrl K This feature allows you to view the abstract for and download into Spot all the AORs in an approved Spitzer observing program directiy from our database You can then save these AORs on your local disk and or modify the most up to date set of AORs for a program You must be connected to the Internet and see the Net Up icon in Spot to download a Program from the SSC Program identification is by program name or program identification number entered in the dialog sh
260. t here recommendations for the peak up targets Point Source Peak up Targets For the blue peak up array a source with a flux less than 5 mJy will be very risky and time consuming The saturation limit is 150 mJy In Spot you cannot enter a flux value for blue peak up larger than 450 mJy For the red peak up array a source with a flux less than 15 mJy will be very risky and time consuming The saturation limit is 340 mJy In Spot you cannot enter a flux value for red peak up larger than 1000 mJy Extended Source Peak up Targets The minimum recommended intensity of an extended source is 15 MJy Sr for the blue peak up array and 10 MJy Sr for the red peak June 18 2008 96 Spot User s Guide v18 up array The saturation limit for extended peak up targets is 340 MJy Sr In Spot you cannot enter a flux value larger than 700 MJy Sr for an extended source fe ue agent sss Unique AOR Label RSS 0000 Target Dummy Encke Type Fixed Single Position 23h23m08 47000s 1d43m04 0000s Hew Target Modify Targ Target List Peak Up Settings Choose one Peak Up mode IRS Peak Up PCRS Peak Up No Peak Up Peakup Target Accuracy Moderate S i Specifications Position Peak up Bands Blue 13 3 18 7um gt De Lon 23h21m31 77000s O Offset Lat 1d37m44 9000s Position View Modify Peak Up Target z Flux Density 17 4 2MASS selection _ Extended Source
261. t you can move the image by using the left mouse button 7 8 11 Visualization Show Side Bar on Current Frame shift ctrl B This allows you to manage your screen real estate If you are working on a very small screen you may wish to turn off the sidebars on the right hand side of the image that allow you to manipulate overlays This option allows you to show or hide them 7 8 12 Visualization Show Side Bar on All Frames ctrl B This allows you to manage your screen real estate If you are working on a very small screen you may wish to turn off the sidebars on the right hand side of the images that allow you to manipulate overlays This option allows you to show or hide them 7 9 Window Menu This menu shows Observations and the names of any images currently displayed in Spot It brings to front the window you choose Selecting Observations brings forward the main AOR table It is very useful for managing Spot if you are displaying several images and going back and forth between them and the AOR table An example showing the menu is in Figure 47 The main screen and displayed images can also be selected by using the tabs at the bottom of the main screen see Figure 50 7 10 Help Menu 7 10 1 Overview This is the access point to the Spot on line help Please also see the Spitzer Observer s Manual and the Spot Release Notes as well as the additional information available on the SSC Proposal Kit web page 7 10 2 Tip Of The Day T
262. talogs Carlsberg Meridian Catalog 14 DENIS database DENIS Consortium 2005 General Cataloa of Variable Stars All Cataloas gt Where Clear Selections Overlay catalog in current frame Radius Arc Seconds ES 72 0 Overlay catalog in all frames VizieR catalog access is in Beta Tre You should keep the query size small less than 100 arcsec unless data content is small VizieR currently only works with target names that are Simbad resolvable Help J Cancel mm 5 Figure 28 Spot currently serves catalogs from VizieR that can be overlaid onto the image display Local Catal og Table File Look In C spot z ca lela Hj C fsc_m34 tbl Where e Overlay catalog in current frame Overlay catalog in all frames File Name fsc m31 tbl Files of Type Catalog Table Files tbl B Open Cancel F igure 29 This dialog will allow you to select a local catalog file in the modified IPAC table format to overlay onto your images June 18 2008 35 Spot User s Guide v18 7 7 1 4 Catalog File Spot can also overlay a catalog file from local disk if it is in the modified IPAC table format The selection dialog is shown in Figure 29 A description of the modified IPAC table format is provided below The file should have the tbl extension so that Spot knows it is an IPAC table The format is comprised of three parts keywords colum
263. tation Start Shadow End Date 2007 Jun 20 Date 2007 Jul 20 Time 02 07 00 Time 02 06 00 Calculate Position Angle Equatorial Calculate Shadow Visibility Date PA IRS Short Low IRS Long Low IRS Short Hi IRS Long Hi IRS Peak up MIPS In scan MIPS SED slit 2007 Jun 20 02 64 40 149 09 65 59 105 89 21 09 61 39 154 40 68 10 2007 Jun 22 02 64 83 149 52 66 02 106 32 21 52 61 82 154 83 68 53 2007 Jun 24 02 65 28 149 97 66 47 106 77 21 97 62 27 155 28 68 98 2007 Jun 26 02 65 75 150 44 66 94 107 24 22 44 62 74 155 75 69 45 2007 Jun 28 02 66 23 150 92 67 42 107 72 22 92 63 22 156 23 69 93 2007 Jun 30 02 66 73 151 42 67 92 108 22 23 42 63 72 156 73 70 43 2007 Jul 02 02 67 26 151 95 68 45 108 75 23 95 64 25 157 26 70 96 2007 Jul 04 02 67 82 152 51 69 01 109 31 24 51 64 81 157 82 71 52 2007 Jul 06 02 68 40 153 09 69 59 109 89 25 09 65 39 158 40 72 10 2007 Jul 08 02 69 02 153 71 70 21 110 51 25 71 66 01 159 02 72 72 2007 Jul 10 02 69 68 154 37 70 87 111 17 26 37 66 67 159 68 73 38 2007 Jul 12 02 70 37 155 06 71 56 111 86 27 06 67 36 160 37 74 07 2007 Jul 14 02 71 12 155 81 72 31 112 61 27 81 68 11 161 12 74 82 aana nane Aa gt v an ree en ERD DEET ao en conn tena ae en Help Done Figure 65 The Visibility Orientation dialog that shows the windows when your moving target is visible Additionally by clicking the Calculate Shadow Visibility button you can determine the windows when shadow observations are
264. the Image window see e g Figure 22 Choose the color plane into which you wish to read the image In Figure 142 we illustrate this with a generic FITS file in this case a Spitzer image of M51 from the SINGS Legacy program The IRAC Channel 1 3 6 um image is read into the blue color band To read in another image and map it into another color plane for instance green select the Add Color green item in the layer control box shown in Figure 142 for the base image This results in a menu from which you can select the next image in the composite Figure 143 In this case we will select the Channel 2 4 5 um Spitzer image of M51 to map into green Finally we will select the Channel 4 8 0 um image to map into the red The resulting three color composite is shown in Figure 144 The three images do not necessarily need to be from the same image source You also do not need to use all three color planes For instance the composite shown in Figure 145 is assembled from the DSS image of M51 mapped into the blue band the 2MASS K image mapped into green and the IRAC 8 0 um image mapped into red Note that Spot will automatically perform any transformations for the images so that they are registered to a common reference frame using the WCS information in each of the image headers You can use the layer controls for each image to show hide the layer delete the layer or adjust the color table for the layer 15 1 6 Cropping Images The
265. the celestial poles and it is crucial for your science that you have an exact RA and DEC you should use a fixed cluster position target type Target Name required SIMBAD Resolve the Name Visibility Orientation Background Fixed Single Fixed Cluster Fixed Cluster Positions Moving Single Moving Cluster Coord Sys Equatorial J2000 w No RA Lon DeciLat Equatorial J2000 ke EN Der yD Epoch 1 Equatorial B1950 3000 00 2 Galactic 2000 00 3 Ecliptic J2000 2000 00 4 Ecliptic B1950 2000 00 5 2000 00 6 2000 00 7 2000 00 8 2000 00 9 2000 00 10 2000 00 11 2000 00 12 2000 00 13 2000 00 14 2000 00 15 i l I 2000 00 16 2000 00 17 2000 00 18 2000 00 19 2000 00 Bright Moving Objects to Avoid vi Earth Moon vi Others Figure 56 The entry dialog for a fixed cluster positions target with the menu showing the five coordinate systems available for coordinate entry for inertial targets June 18 2008 66 Spot User s Guide v18 The offset cluster allows you to easily do sky backgrounds or make an irregularly shaped map without having to create a separate AOR for each position Selecting Observe Offsets Only means that data will not be taken at the target position This option is useful if you do not want to observe a very br
266. tification file you should ensure the AORs in Spot are the right ones for updating AORs or that the Proposal Submission Tool is pointing to the correct updated Scientific Justification file Click OK to proceed with the submission process vi vi Successful Update Your proposal was successfully updated OK Figure 140 Spot will bring up this dialog window if your proposal was successfully updated at the SSC The submitter will also receive a confirmation email To update your proposal check that the Net is Up in Spot and open the Proposal Submission Tool and read in the coversheet file that was saved to disk when you initially submitted your proposal The shorthand proposal user name will now appear in the lower left corner of the Proposal Submission Tool window Update any coversheet information as needed If you need to update AORs load the revised set of AORs into Spot If you have updated the scientific justification file and changed its path or filename update the information in the Proposal Submission Tool You do not need to load up ALL the June 18 2008 133 Spot User s Guide v18 components of your proposal to update just one part of it However you do need to load in the coversheet file into the Proposal Submission Tool When you have the corrected material in place click Submit on the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window and choose Update proposal at SSC Spot will then ask if you
267. tings Readout Mode Field of View For each Pointing e Full Array v 3 6um 5 8um Number of Frames 1 _ High Dynamic Range E 4 5um 8 0um _ Stellar Mode Frame Time secs 12 z Mapping and Dithering Mapping Mode SE Yes Set Mapping Parameters Dither Pattern 2 No Yes Set Dither Parameters Flux Density Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special Vis Window Exposures Help Cancel OK Figure 70 The IRAC Mapping AOT showing the Full Array mode dialog 11 1 IRAC Mapping The IRAC AOT Figure 70 includes several modes of imaging including Full Array mode High Dynamic Range HDR mode Subarray mode and Stellar mode You should consult the Spitzer Observer s Manual for details about each of these modes Operationally within the AOT the Full Array and HDR mode settings i e fields of view longest frame time duration mapping and dithering parameters are very similar For HDR mode one or more short duration exposures are taken along with the longest duration exposure Note that for both Full Array and HDR modes the 200 sec frame time is no longer being supported in the SSC pipeline If you select this frame time in a new AOR the warning June 18 2008 83 Spot User s Guide v18 message shown in Figure 71 will pop up You will be asked to change the frame time to 100 sec Warming Warning The SSC is no longer supporting new AO
268. tion After selecting the AOR and displaying the images we select AORs on Current Image from the Overlays menu When the dialog opens requesting an observation date see Figure 38 in section 7 7 14 either enter a date or hit return Hitting return selects a date in the middle of the next available visibility period The area coverage for the AOR is now displayed in Figure 157 The area covered by the AOR is shown on both the 5 ISSA image and the 250 2MASS image for clarity only one exposure at each map position is shown Clearly for large maps you can only really see what the sky coverage is in the larger image Layer controls for the AOR overlays appear in the side bars of the displayed images These are labeled with the AOR name IRAC 0000 The pointings table icon D in the June 18 2008 149 Spot User s Guide v18 layer control allows you to modify how the AOR overlay is displayed If you click on it the resulting dialog is shown in Figure 158 Each box drawn in the overlay has a corresponding line in this table The field of view FOV selected here in each case is the IRAC position between the two arrays which is the FOV for mapping in full array mode with both FOVs selected These can be individually turned on and off with the checkboxes or you can use the animation buttons to see how the overlay is created one box at a time The Animation button will cycle through each IRAC FOV box in the overlay The Anim
269. tion and its corresponding date from the objects orbital path and entering this as a fixed target position These capabilities are provided to allow the user to optimize moving target observations with Spitzer by selecting the best available backgrounds times for observation and by being able to visualize the AOR pattern across the sky and the effect of nearby bright objects on the planned observation 16 2 Getting Started Before you can use the Spot visualization capabilities to display your moving target you need to enter a moving target using the target entry window or have a Spot target list available from which to choose If you would like to display a moving target AOR you need to enter the target and create the AOR first see section 9 16 2 1 Selecting a Background Sky Image Once you have your moving target and or moving target AOR select Images from the menu bar and select the type of image you would like to have used to show the background of the target The visualization section for fixed targets section 15 describes the types of images that can be used including a user provided FITS image with some important caveats on their suitability for quantitative background estimates Note that if you are observing a rapidly moving object such as a comet or near Earth asteroid on close pass to Earth it may be more instructive to select the All Sky Images option section 7 6 11 at least until you can determine the extent of the o
270. tr1 N shift ctr1l P ctrl A shift ctrl A 51 Spot User s Guide v18 Memory Monitor IMAGES MENU ISSA IRIS Image 2MASS Image MSX Image DSS Image S N ky View Image ED Image ISO Archive Image NVO Image FITS File Image FITS file from URL All Sky Images Blank Image OVERLAYS MENU Catalogs from IPAC Catalogs from HEASARC Catalogs from VizieR Beta Catalog File Overlay PCRS Catalog Crop Grid ctrl G Distance Tool shift ctrl D Slice Tool Area Statistics Mark Objects on Plot User created catalog Current Fixed Target Add Moving Target Image Overlays Show all known moving objects at a date Spitzer Focal Plane Generic Focal Plane AORS on images shift ctrl 0 Read AOR Overlay Mapping file Show Spitzer OPZ Spitzer Bright Objects for AOR Show Depth of Coverage Maps on current image OPTIONS MENU Use Automatic Spot Version Update Sum Only Checked AORs Sort by Dec then RA Visualization Spitzer Focal Plane Options Visualization Coordinate System Prefs Visualization Readout Prefs Cache Prefs Network Proxy Setup Use Large Control Icons Visualization Show Mouse Help shift ctr1 M Visualization Show Side Bar on Current Frame shift ctrl1 B Visualization Show Side Bar on All Frames ctrl1 B WINDOW Observations Open image windows June 18 2008 52 Overview Tip Of The Day AOR File Format Changes AOT
271. traint flag is automatically checked indicating that the timing constraint has been created To create the follow on portion of the constraint select the Follow on tab in the constraints dialog This is shown in Figure 111 eoe Constraint Editor Constraint Editor Tool Add Constraint then Drag AORs to Constraint Window Add Constraints Parameters Add Follow On Modify Paramete Add Comments Perform Action Remove GetAOR MoveUp Move Down Drop AORs Constraints Help Cancel Apply OK Figure 111 The follow on section of the constraint editor dialog is shown Click Add Follow On to create a new constraint Then click the Add Follow On button that opens the dialog shown in Figure 112 The default name is FollowOn 0000 and the parameters here constrain the phase 2 observation to be executed between 36 hours 1 day 12 hours and 72 hours 3 days after the phase 1 observation is executed eoe Follow On Parameters Parameters Number of Days start 1 Number of Days end 3 I Time start 12 00 00 Time end 00 00 00 Constraint Name FollowOn 0000 Cancel OK Figure 112 Enter the parameters for a new follow on constraint in this dialog The default name is FollowOn 0000 and the parameters here constrain the phase 2 observation to be executed between 36 hours 1 day 12 hours and 72 hours 3 days after the phase 1 observation is executed
272. tware Interactions The Spot software that you download onto your computer acts as the client and requests information over the network from the server software located at the Spitzer Science Center SSC The main server that provides observing time estimates for Spot is called AIRE i e the AOR Interpreter and Resource Estimator An AOR is an Astronomical Observation Request Entry of targets and Astronomical Observation Template AOT parameters are self contained within Spot An Internet connection to contact the servers is required to calculate observing time estimates obtain visibility windows obtain background estimates and download astronomical images and catalogs When the servers are accessible by Spot the net up symbol Figure 1 will appear at the bottom of the main Spot window Figure 1 The net up symbol means Spot can access the SSC servers The net must be up to calculate observing time estimates obtain visibility windows obtain background estimates or download images or catalogs If your computer is not connected to the Internet or if our servers are temporarily down the net down symbol Figure 2 will appear at the bottom of the main Spot window Figure 2 The net down symbol means Spot cannot access the SSC servers You may still enter target and AOT information when the net is down but you cannot calculate observing time estimates obtain visibility windows obtain background estimates or downloa
273. ty Orientation Background Coord Sys Equatorial J2000 e Offset in Equatorial J2000 RA 6h34m02 55s Offset East 120 000 Dec 17d46m12 9s otro D Figure 92 The fixed target dialog that appears allowing you to enter the position of your sky background observation IRS Staring Unique AOR Label RSS 0000_background Target Geminga_background Type Fixed Single Position 6h34m02 55000s 17 d46m12 9000s New Target Modify Targ Target List Peak Up Settings Choose one Peak Up mode IRS Peak Up PCRS Peak Up No Peak Up Peak Up Disabled Instrument Settings You may select one mode Standard or Peak Up Only Standard Peakup Only IRS Slit sss Duration s of Cycles Hi Res 9 9 19 6 um n gt a P E s Bs s wawawa Flux Density Calc Obs Time Comments Sensitivity Special vis Window Coe ee e Figure 93 The IRS Staring AOT for your sky background observation Only the high resolution modules slits need to be activated for this AOR and this is the default You can vary the desired ramp duration and number of cycles for each high resolution module as needed June 18 2008 101 Spot User s Guide v18 After selecting to generate the AOR a target dialog Figure 92 will appear with the target already identified as your target with the suffix background Enter the positi
274. uivalent is the green button Bin the upper left hand corner The iconify icon r will iconify the image and place the icon at the bottom of the Spot window the Mac equivalent is the yellow button S in the upper left hand corner To delete the image window click on the delete icon in the upper right hand corner the Mac equivalent is the red button in the upper left hand corner 15 1 3 Cursor Readout When you move your cursor over an image the flux pixel scale and two sets of coordinate values are displayed below the Spot icon bar See section 7 8 6 to select which coordinate values Spot returns in these displays For the ISSA images Spot returns flux values in MJy Sr in the left most readout below the icon bar For the 2MASS images you should not rely on DN readout for photometry Use the 2MASS catalogs for accurate photometric measurements 15 1 4 Layer Control The side bar to the right of the image frames Figure 141 shows a box that says Base Image with show hide layer l delete layer x opacity control color table control 5 and image header icons in it If you click the show hide layer icon Spot hides or shows the image If you click the delete layer icon the image layer in the frames will be deleted The opacity control icon brings up an image opacity control dialog This allows you to control how opaque will be the image layer This is very useful if you have a second image as an overlay in a frame not loaded
275. ur image The dialog is shown in Figure 36 cl m Generic Focal Plane Focal Plane Type Circle m Side Diameter 120 Shape Color Cancel Help Figure 36 The generic focal plane selection dialog allows the user draw a square or circle of user selected size and orientation onto an image June 18 2008 41 7 7 14 AORs on Images shift ctrl O Spot User s Guide v18 This function allows you to overlay the area coverage for one or more AORs onto the displayed images see section 15 7 4 When AOR overlay is selected the dialog shown in Figure 37 asks you which AORs to overlay The current one only selected AORs only AORs checked in the Observations window or all AORs currently loaded in Spot Next the dialog window for target visibility shown in Figure 38 displays the visibility windows for the target as well as a date in the middle of the next available visibility window which is the default selection unless the AOR has already been executed If you want to plot the AOR for a specific observation date within any visibility window enter that date here You can click on any visibility window in the dialog to automatically select the mid date in that window Or just select the default Click OK for the overlay See the example in section 15 6 for a description of how it works Spot must be connected to the Internet to do the overlay as it contacts the SSC AIRE and Visi
276. v18 W provides you with a pulldown menu from which you can select other images to overlay on the current image File Edit Targets Observation Tools Images Overlays Options Window Help eoe Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Jalala ziala eis nue ES See D Observations Astronomical Observation Requests AORSs Label Target Position Type T G F Duration Stat Instrument On IRAC 0000 m31 0h42m44 Fixed Single mi mi miu new IRAC Mapping M IRSI 0000 m31 0h42m44 Fixed Single SEB o new IRS Peakup Im Mi IRSS 0000 m31 0h42m44 Fixed Single JN PH Sty new IRS Staring v MIPSP 0000 m31 0h42m44 Fixed Single BEB is28 new MIPS Photomet i MIPST 0000 m31 0h42m44 Fixed Single Vit E p2s98 new MIPS Total Power Mi 3 Observations Target m31 Type Fixed Single Total Duration hrs 6 1 Figure 50 The main screen shows the Observations window displaying a table of the AORs currently loaded into Spot 8 2 Observations Window The list of AORs currently loaded in Spot is shown on the main screen Figure 50 in the Observations For each AOR it lists Unique AOR Label Target Name Abbreviated Target Position Target Type T timing constraint flag G grouping constraint flag F follow on constraint flag Instrument AOT selected Duration total wall clock time in seconds for this AOR June 18 2008 56 Spot User s Guide v18 Stat status
277. vation is executed but the map positions will be placed on a celestial coordinate grid In both cases you input the number of rows columns and the step sizes in arcseconds The IRAC fields of view are arranged on the Spitzer focal plane in a column one above the other see Figure 66 If both fields of view are selected for a map using ARRAY orientation the map is done once with the map grid positions centered between the two IRAC fields of view If both fields of view are selected for a map using CELESTIAL orientation the map is done twice once centered on each FOV lrow x4 columns 4 rows x 1 column Figure 76 The relationship between rows and columns in the IRAC Mapping AOT is illustrated Each position in the map is indicated by a different shade of color For the 1 row x 4 column plot the two IRAC fields of view are shown 1 x 1 mapping is possible but it does not behave just like pointed IRAC observations You will miss the target it will be in between the two apertures if you have both apertures selected and you choose to do a 1 x 1 map Choosing just June 18 2008 87 Spot User s Guide v18 one aperture will center the target in that aperture Visualize any 1 x 1 mapping AORs to ensure you are getting the spatial coverage you need The map center offset fields allow an initial offset in coordinates oriented with the array before the map is executed Dithering The IRAC AOT prov
278. ve Target Background Estimate Save Target Visibility Windows Save Current Plotted Image as F Save Current Plotted Image amp Ov ctrl J View Program Search Programs Check In Program Quit n ENU Undo D te S cted AORS Modify current AOR Copy Selected AORs Delete A AORS Delete A Targets Enable A AORS Disable all AORs without G F Co Toggle On Flag AORs without TARG ET MENU OBSERV TOOLS June 18 New Target Delete Target Modify Target Target List Calculate Visibility Windows Calculate Background for All fo Ta ATION MENU IRS Staring IRS Spectral Mapping IRS Peakup Imaging IRAC Mapping IRAC Post Cryo Mapping MIPS Scan Map MIPS Photometry Super Resolutio MIPS Spectral Energy Distributi MIPS Total Power M AO We ENU R Replica L Target Replication Tool Group Follow on Constraints Timing Constraints Proposal Submission Tool Show Current Resource Estimates Recompute All Estimates Compute Backgrounds from File tion Tool P 2008 ctrl 0O ctrl1 S Leer i t s ITS fil erlays le to tr Gr tr Fri aaaa Kal Gtr nstraints G F constraints shift Chri trl F EG GIF BMP c JP or PNG Letrk D ctrl W ctrl T ctrl1l L r All Targets rgets n on ctr1 N shift c
279. ving target observations To specify a shadow observation in Spot create the AOR for your primary observation your moving target and then use the AOR Replication Tool under Tools menu in Spot to create a copy of this AOR Then use the Shadow constraint found under the Group Follow on constraints again under Tools see Figure 61 to link the two AORs Spot will understand these two AORs to consist of the primary and the shadow The time interval between these two observations and the order of their execution i e the allocation of which is shadow and which is primary is specified using the Shadow Parameters window Figure 62 When the primary is executed the ephemeris for the moving target will be used for that date and this is the observation for which you will acquire scientific information on your object The shadow is executed at a user specified time interval either before OR after the primary observation depending on whether the June 18 2008 72 Spot User s Guide v18 Shadow before Primary box is checked or unchecked respectively and replicates the path across the sky that will be taken or has been taken during the observation of the primary on the date that the primary will be or was observed Constraint Editor Tool Add Constraint then Drag AORs to Constraint Window Group Follow On Shadow Add Constraints Parameters Add Shadow Modify Paramete Add Comments
280. widths in arcseconds of the IRS Slits Figure 90 An illustration of IRS Spectral Mapping pattern directions At the top it shows three positions in the direction parallel to the slit one row and three columns and at the bottom it shows three positions in the direction perpendicular to the slit three rows and one column You have requested observations using one or both of the high resolution modules The Spitzer Observer s Manual strongly recommends that you take accompanying off source background measurements particularly for equivalent point source flux densities of 2 0 Jy or less at 25 microns Spot can generate a companion AOR in which you can specify an offset position and a suitable number of cycles for the background measurement The background measurement will be executed immediately prior to observations of your science targets Do you want to generate a background AOR Generate Background AOR Skip Background Measurements Figure 91 The dialog that appears after you create an IRS Staring AOR which includes observing in a high resolution module SH or LH You can select to proceed in generating a sky background AOR or skip this step altogether June 18 2008 100 Spot User s Guide v18 Target for IRS Background AOR Original Target Geminga Type Fixed Single Position 6h33m54 15000s 17 d46m12 9000s Target Nam Geminga_backg round Visibili
281. y a different person as TC you can clear the Contact information by clicking the Clear button to the right of the Contact button Then open the Contact Information window and enter the appropriate information If most of the Contact s information is similar to the PI information you may find it easier to not clear the Contact information and just change the appropriate fields The name of the Contact will appear in the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window and also on the cover page Done Modify Principal Investigator Clear Tom Soifer Done Modify Contact Clear Tom Soifer Figure 120 Part of the Proposal Submission Tool Main Window The PI and Contact names appear to the right when these fields are filled in and if all fields are filled in a Done appears to the left incomplete Modify Principal Investigator Clear Tom Soifer Incomplete Modify Contact Clear Tom Soifer Figure 121 If some of the PI or Contact information is not filled in Incomplete appears to the left of the item You can still save the coversheet to disk but all information must be complete Done when actually submitting the proposal to the SSC 14 4 Add Co Investigators Click on the Add Co Investigators button to bring up the co investigator window as shown in Figure 122 a Actions Add Co I Name Institute E mail
282. ype Fixed Single Figure 163 The overlay of both the IRAC Mapping AOR and the IRS Staring AOR on the ISSA 25 um image and the 2MASS K band image on the same date for visualization June 18 2008 154 eoe Spot User s Guide v18 Spot Spitzer Planning Observations Tool Yb DA ad egen et e s a2 Z S Pointings Table IRSM Rin Controls EE _ Hide All Animation Animation w Mouse Control IS Shift Left Button Center the Image at point On Fie Of Vi RA Dec De ka An date Aale vele jg Meuse CY WJ IRS_Short Lo_ 283 4 33 021 A V IRS_Short Lo_ 283 4C33 021 EK Be 1 Ring nebula EF F Ie 2766 Q EECH V IRS_Short Lo_ 283 3C33 02 a R wwe Chare ta 992 2c22 N j Roll Angle 280 62 Date 2008 Oct 24 Ji at U 00 00 GMT A gt 1 i NM Help Done e SBS We Kl CT TO IRSM Ring Parts e 0 Short Low 5 3 8 5 G ane ny EE 3 8 ua d ixvisiaim Short Low 7 4 14 2 NU IRS Red Peak up 2 IRS Blue Peak up 2 IRS Red Peak up 1 IRS Blue Peak up 1 elei loooo R e Help Done Observations E 2MASS j Ring Nebula Total Duration hrs 1 1 Target Ring Nebula Type Fixed Single Figure 164 Example IRS Spectral Mapping AOR on a 2MASS J band image of the Ring Nebula Details of the AOR are given above Below are the details of the IR

User`s Guide - Spitzer Science Center

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents